Operation Manual

DVD RDS AV RECEIVER
AVH-P4100DVD
English
<CRB2878-A> <1>
Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product.
Please read through this manual before using the product for the first time, to en-
sure proper use. After reading, please keep the manual in a safe and accessible place
for future reference.
Be sure to read this
! DVD video disc region numbers 7
! When an operation is prohibited 9
! Handling guideline of discs and player 93
Precautions
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS 5
To ensure safe driving 5
To avoid battery exhaustion 6
Before You Start
About this unit 7
About this manual 7
Visit our website 7
In case of trouble 8
Features 8
When an operation is prohibited 9
Resetting the microprocessor 9
Feature demo mode 9
What’s what
Head unit 10
Optional remote control 10
Basic Operations
Power ON/OFF 11
Selecting a source 11
Adjusting the volume 12
Touch panel key basic operation 12
Adjusting the LCD panel angle 14
Built-in DVD player basic operations 14
Radio
Listening to the radio 16
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 17
Displaying the PTY information 17
Using radio text 17
Introduction of advanced tuner
operation 18
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 18
Tuning in strong signals 18
Selecting alternative frequencies 18
Receiving traffic announcements 19
Using PTY functions 20
PTY list 20
Playing DVD discs
Watching a DVD 22
Selecting titles from the title list 23
Displaying information of DVD-VR 23
Skipping back or forward to another title 23
Operating the DVD menu 23
Selecting the play mode 24
Resume playback (Bookmark) 24
CM skip/CM back 24
Frame-by-frame playback 24
Slow motion playback 24
Pausing playback 25
Searching for the part you want to play 25
Changing audio language during playback
(Multi-audio) 25
Changing the subtitle language during
playback (Multi-subtitle) 26
Changing the viewing angle during playback
(Multi-angle) 26
Return to the specified scene 26
Automatic playback of DVDs 26
Introduction of advanced DVD operation 26
Repeating play 27
Selecting audio output 27
Playing Video CDs
Watching a Video CD 28
PBC playback 28
Frame-by-frame playback 29
Slow motion playback 29
Pausing playback 29
Searching for a desired scene, starting
playback from a specified time 29
Introduction of advanced Video CD
operation 29
Contents
En
2
Repeating play 30
Selecting audio output 30
Playing CDs
Listening to a CD 31
Selecting tracks from the track title list 31
Pausing playback 31
Switching the media file type 32
Using advanced sound retriever 32
Introduction of advanced CD operation 32
Repeating play 32
Playing tracks in random order 32
Scanning tracks of a CD 32
Playing compressed audio
Listening to compressed audio 33
Selecting files from the file name list 34
Pausing playback 34
Switching the media file type 34
Using advanced sound retriever 34
Introduction of advanced compressed audio
operation 34
Repeating play 35
Playing tracks in random order 35
Scanning folders and tracks 35
Playing DivX/JPEG files
Watching a DivX/JPEG 36
Viewing a JPEG slideshow 37
Playing DivX® VOD content 37
Selecting files from the file name list 37
Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG
disc 38
Pausing playback 38
Switching the media file type 38
Searching for the part you want to play 38
Changing audio language during playback
(Multi-audio) 38
Changing the subtitle language during
playback (Multi-subtitle) 38
Capture an image in JPEG files 38
Introduction of advanced DivX/JPEG
operation 39
Repeating play 39
Playing files in random order 39
Playing songs in a USB storage device
Basic Operations 40
Selecting files from the file name list 41
Pausing compressed audio playback 41
Switching the media file type 41
Using advanced sound retriever 41
Introduction to advanced operations 41
Using iPod
Basic Operations 42
Playing video 43
Browsing for a song/video 43
Displaying text information on iPod
Video 44
Pausing a song 44
Using advanced sound retriever 44
Repeating play 44
Playing songs/videos in a random order
(shuffle) 45
Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle
all) 45
Operating this unit’s iPod function from your
iPod 45
Selecting songs from lists related to the
currently playing song 45
Changing audiobook speed 45
Changing the screen mode 46
Audio Adjustments
Introduction of audio adjustments 47
Using balance adjustment 47
Using the equalizer 47
Adjusting loudness 48
Using subwoofer output 48
Boosting the bass 48
Using the high pass filter 49
Adjusting source levels 49
Setting up the DVD player
Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 50
Setting the subtitle language 50
En
3
Contents
Setting the audio language 50
Setting the menu language 51
Setting the angle icon display 51
Setting the aspect ratio 51
Setting the slide show interval 51
Setting the parental lock 52
Setting the DivX subtitle file 52
Displaying your DivX® VOD registration
code 53
Setting for digital output 53
Initial Settings
Adjusting initial settings 54
Switching the auxiliary setting 54
Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller 54
Setting the FM tuning step 55
Switching Auto PI Seek 55
Selecting menu language 55
Switching the sound muting/attenuation 56
Setting the TV signal 56
Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless
connection 56
Correcting distorted sound 56
Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and
auto-equalizing) 57
Resetting the audio functions 57
System settings
Introduction of system adjustments 58
Changing the wide screen mode 58
Changing the picture adjustment 59
Setting the AV input 59
Setting the clock 60
Setting for rear view camera (back up
camera) 60
Entertainment settings
Introduction of entertainment settings 61
Selecting the background display 61
Selecting the illumination color 61
Selecting the OSD color 62
Other Functions
Adjusting the response positions of the
touch panels (Touch Panel
Calibration) 63
Using the AUX source 63
Using the external unit 64
Available accessories
Bluetooth Audio 66
Bluetooth Telephone 68
TV tuner 75
Digital Signal Processor 76
Additional Information
Troubleshooting 87
Error messages 89
Understanding auto TA and EQ error
messages 91
Understanding messages 92
Handling guideline of discs and player 93
DVD discs 93
DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 94
AVCHD recorded discs 94
CD-R/CD-RW discs 94
Dual Discs 94
Compressed audio compatibility 95
Handling guideline and supplemental
information 95
Example of a hierarchy 96
iPod compatibility 96
About handling the iPod 97
JPEG picture files 97
DivX video files 97
Using the display correctly 98
Language code chart for DVD 100
Copyright and trademark notice 101
Terms 103
Specifications 106
Index 107
Contents
En
4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Please read all of these instructions regarding
your display and retain them for future refer-
ence.
1 Read this manual fully and carefully be-
fore operating your display.
2 Keep this manual handy as a reference for
operating procedures and safety informa-
tion.
3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions care-
fully.
4 Do not allowother persons to use this sys-
tem until they have read and understood
the operating instructions.
5 Do not install the display where it may (i)
obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair the
performance of any of the vehicle’s oper-
ating systems or safety features, includ-
ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii)
impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-
ate the vehicle.
6 Do not operate this display if doing so in
any way will divert your attention from
the safe operation of your vehicle. Always
observe safe driving rules and follow all
existing traffic regulations. If you experi-
ence difficulty in operating the system or
reading the display, park your vehicle in a
safe location and make necessary adjust-
ments.
7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at
all times while operating your vehicle. If
you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe if your
seat belt is not properly buckled.
8 Never use headphones while driving.
9 To promote safety, certain functions are
disabled unless the parking brake is on,
and the vehicle is not in motion.
10 Never set the volume of your display so
high that you cannot hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
WARNING
! Do not attempt to install or service your
display by yourself. Installation or servi-
cing of the display by persons without
training and experience in electronic
equipment and automotive accessories
may be dangerous and could expose you
to the risk of electric shock or other
hazards.
To ensure safe driving
WARNING
! LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT
PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE
OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF
THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE
LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DAMAGE.
! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the
potential violation of applicable laws, this unit
is not for use with a video screen that is visible
to the driver.
! To avoid the risk of accident and the potential
violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or
TV (sold separately) feature should never be
used while the vehicle is being driven. Also,
rear displays should not be in a location
where they are visibly distracting to the driver.
! In some countries or states the viewing of
images on a display inside a vehicle even by
persons other than the driver may be illegal.
Where such regulations apply, they must be
obeyed and this unit’s DVD features should
not be used.
When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD
or TV while driving, the warning Viewing of
front seat video source while driving is
strictly prohibited. will appear on the front
display.
Precautions
En
5
Section
01
P
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s
To watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front
display, park your vehicle in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
When using a display
connected to V OUT
This unit’s V OUT is for connection of a dis-
play to enable passengers in the rear seats to
watch the DVD or TV.
WARNING
NEVER install the rear display in a location that
enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while
driving.
When using a rear view camera
With an optional rear view camera, you are
able to use this unit as an aid to keep an eye
on trailers, or backing into a tight parking
spot.
WARNING
! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR RE-
VERSED.
! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR
MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.
OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY
OR DAMAGE.
CAUTION
! The rear view camera function is to be used
as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while
backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur-
poses.
! Please note that the edges of the rear view
camera images may differ slightly according
to whether full screen images are displayed
when backing up, and whether the images are
used for checking the rear when the vehicle is
moving forward.
To avoid battery exhaustion
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using
this unit. Using this unit without running the
engine can result in battery drainage.
! When no power is supplied to this unit be-
cause of a replacement of the vehicle bat-
tery or for some similar reason, the
microcomputer of this unit is returned to
its initial condition. We recommend that
you transcribe the audio adjustment data.
WARNING
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an
ACC position.
Precautions
En
6
Section
01
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix
it with general household waste. There is a se-
parate collection system for used electronic
products in accordance with legislation that re-
quires proper treatment, recovery and recy-
cling.
Private households in the member states of
the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return
their used electronic products free of charge
to designated collection facilities or to a retai-
ler (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please
contact your local authorities for the correct
method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed
product undergoes the necessary treatment,
recovery and recycling and thus prevent po-
tential negative effects on the environment
and human health.
About this unit
The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo-
cated for use in Western Europe, Asia, the
Middle East, Africa and Oceania. Use in other
areas may result in poor reception. The RDS
(radio data system) function operates only in
areas with FM stations broadcasting RDS sig-
nals.
CAUTION
! Do not allow this unit to come into contact
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.
Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over-
heating could result from contact with liquids.
! “CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT”
This product contains a laser diode of higher
class than 1. To ensure continued safety, do
not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac-
cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser-
vicing to qualified personnel.
! The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in
Germany.
! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op-
erating procedures and precautions.
! Always keep the volume low enough so that
you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle.
! Protect this unit from moisture.
! If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the preset memory will be erased and must be
reprogrammed.
DVD video disc region numbers
DVD video discs that have incompatible region
numbers cannot be played on this player. The
region number of the player can be found on
the bottom of this unit and this manual (refer
to Specifications on page 106).
About this manual
This unit features a number of sophisticated
functions ensuring superior reception and op-
eration. All the functions have been designed
for the easiest possible use, but many are not
self-explanatory. This operation manual will
help you benefit fully from this unit’s potential
and to maximize your listening enjoyment.
We recommend that you familiarize yourself
with the functions and their operation by read-
ing through the manual before you begin
using this unit. It is especially important that
you read and observe WARNINGs and CAU-
TIONs in this manual.
Visit our website
Visit us at the following site:
Before You Start
En
7
Section
02
B
e
f
o
r
e
Y
o
u
S
t
a
r
t
http://www.pioneer.co.uk
! Register your product. We will keep the de-
tails of your purchase on file to help you
refer to this information in the event of an
insurance claim such as loss or theft.
! We offer the latest information about
Pioneer Corporation on our website.
In case of trouble
Should this product fail to operate properly,
contact your dealer or nearest authorized
Pioneer Service Station.
Features
Touch panel key operation
It is possible to operate this unit by using
touch panel key.
Also, scroll bar and scrubber bar can be con-
trolled at your fingertip.
DVD-R/RW compatibility
It is possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs re-
corded with the video format and Video Re-
cording format. (Refer to DVD-R/DVD-RW discs
on page 94.)
Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility
It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring
PBC (playback control).
CD playback
Music CD/CD-R/RW playback is possible.
MP3 file playback
You can play back MP3 files recorded on CD-
R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 stan-
dard), DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 standard, UDF 1.02) and USB storage device
(FAT 16, FAT 32).
WMA file playback
You can play back WMA files recorded on CD-
R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 stan-
dard), DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 standard, UDF 1.02) and USB storage device
(FAT 16, FAT 32).
AAC file playback
You can play back AAC files recorded on CD-
R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 stan-
dard), DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 standard, UDF 1.02) and USB storage device
(FAT 16, FAT 32).
DivX
®
video compatibility
Refer to DivX compatibility on page 98.
JPEG picture file playback
You can play back JPEG picture files recorded
on CD-R/RW/ROM and USB storage device.
Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility
When using this unit with a Pioneer multi-
channel processor, you can enjoy the atmo-
sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie
and music software featuring 5.1 channel re-
cordings.
Portable audio player compatibility
! Make inquiries to the manufacturer about
your USB portable audio player/USB mem-
ory.
This unit corresponds to the following.
— USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) compliant
portable audio player and memory
— WMA, MP3 and AAC file playback
— JPEG file playback
iPod compatibility
This unit can control, listen to songs and view
videos on an iPod.
For details about the supported iPod, refer to
iPod compatibility on page 96.
Hands-free phoning
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200),
this unit realizes effortless hands-free phoning
with Bluetooth wireless technology.
Bluetooth audio player compatibility
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200),
you can control Bluetooth audio player featur-
ing Bluetooth wireless technology.
Before You Start
En
8
Section
02
About DivX
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX
®
video codec from DivX, Inc.
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-
cal order.
Official DivX
®
Certified product
Plays all versions of DivX
®
video (including
DivX
®
6) with standard playback of DivX
®
media files
When an operation is
prohibited
When you are watching a DVD and attempt to
perform an operation, it may not be performed
because of the programming on the disc.
When this happens, the icon appears on
the screen.
! The icon may not appear with certain
discs.
Resetting the microprocessor
Pressing RESET lets you reset the micropro-
cessor to its initial settings without changing
the bookmark information.
The microprocessor must be reset under the
following conditions:
! Prior to using this unit for the first time
after installation
! If the unit fails to operate properly
! When strange or incorrect messages ap-
pear on the display
1 Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other
pointed instrument.
RESET button
Note
After completing connections or when you want
to erase all memorized settings or return the unit
to its initial (factory) settings, switch your engine
ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before
pressing RESET.
Feature demo mode
The feature demo automatically starts when
you select the source Off. The demo continues
while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON.
To cancel the feature demo, press and hold
MUTE. To restart the feature demo, press and
hold MUTE again. Remember that if the fea-
ture demo continues operating when the car
engine is turned off, it may drain battery
power.
Important
The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con-
nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch
on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle
battery may be drained.
Before You Start
En
9
Section
02
B
e
f
o
r
e
Y
o
u
S
t
a
r
t
Head unit
1 RESET button
Press to return to the factory settings (initial
settings).
2 DISP OFF button
Press to turn the information display on or
off.
3 c/d (TRACK) buttons
Press to do manual seek tuning, fast for-
ward, reverse and track search controls.
4 SRC/OFF button
Press to cycle through all the available
sources. Press and hold to turn the source
off.
5 +/– (VOLUME) buttons
Press to increase or decrease the volume.
6 MUTE button
Press to turn off the sound. To turn on the
sound, press again.
7 h(eject) button
Press to eject a disc from this unit.
Optional remote control
The remote control CD-R55 is sold separately.
For details concerning operations, see the re-
mote control manual.
¨ ´ · · '
What’s what
En
10
Section
03
Power ON/OFF
¨¨¨
1 Source icon
Turning the unit on
% When using the touch panel keys,
touch the source icon and then touch the
desired source name.
The source names are displayed and select-
able ones are highlighted.
% When using the button, press SRC/OFF
to turn the unit on.
Turning the unit off
% When using the touch panel keys,
touch the source icon and then touch Off.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
% When using the button, press SRC/OFF
and hold until the unit turns off.
Selecting a source
You can select a source you want to listen to.
To switch to the DVD player, load a disc in the
unit.
% When using the touch panel keys,
touch the source icon and then touch the
desired source name.
The source names are displayed and select-
able ones are highlighted.
! Disc – Built-in DVD player
! Radio – Radio
! TV – Television
! AV – AV input
! EXT-1 – External unit 1
! EXT-2 – External unit 2
! AUX-1 – AUX 1
! AUX-2 – AUX 2
! USB/iPod – USB/iPod
! Telephone – Bluetooth telephone
! BT-AUDIO – Bluetooth audio player
! Rear View – Rear view camera
! Off – Turn the unit off
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
# While operating the menu, you cannot select
a source by touching the source icon.
# To close source select menu, touch ESC.
% When using the button, press SRC/OFF
repeatedly to select a desired source.
Notes
! In the following cases, the sound source will
not change.
— When no unit corresponding to the se-
lected source is connected.
— When there is no disc in the player.
— When AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off
(refer to page 54).
— When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video
(refer to page 59).
! In the following cases, USB/iPod icon will be
changed.
— USB is displayed when USB storage device
is connected.
— iPod is displayed when iPod is connected.
— USB/iPod is displayed when no device is
connected.
! AUX1 is set to on by default. Turn off the AUX1
when not in use (refer to Switching the auxili-
ary setting on page 54).
! Charging the portable audio player using
car’s DC power source while connecting it to
AUX input may generate noise. In this case,
stop charging.
! Rear View (rear view camera) cannot be se-
lected by pressing SRC/OFF.
Basic Operations
En
11
Section
04
B
a
s
i
c
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
! Image from rear view camera can be dis-
played automatically when the appropriate
setting is conducted. For details, refer to Set-
ting for rear view camera (back up camera) on
page 60.
! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such
as ones available in the future) that, although
incompatible as a source, enables control of
basic functions with this unit. Two external
units can be controlled with this unit. When
two external units are connected, the external
unit is automatically allocated to external unit
1 or external unit 2 by this unit.
! When this unit’s blue/white lead is connected
to the vehicle’s auto-antenna relay control
terminal, the vehicle’s antenna extends when
this unit’s source is turned on. To retract the
antenna, turn the source off.
Adjusting the volume
% Press + or – to adjust the sound level.
Touch panel key basic
operation
Activating the touch panel keys
¨
´
1 Information area
Shows the various information depending
on the source.
2 Touch panel keys
Touch to do various operations.
1 Touch the screen to activate the touch
panel keys corresponding to each source.
The touch panel keys appear on the display.
# To go to the next group of touch panel keys,
touch NEXT.
# To return to the previous group of touch panel
keys, touch PREV.
2 Touch Hide to hide the touch panel
keys.
# If you do not use the touch panel keys within
30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically
when selecting video sources.
Basic Operations
En
12
Section
04
Operating the menu
¨´ · '
·
1 Function Menu key
Touch to switch to the functions for each
source.
2 Audio Menu key
Touch to switch to the sound quality control
menu.
3 System Menu key
Touch to switch to the setup functions
menu.
4 Entertainment Menu key
Touch to switch to the entertainment setup
menu.
5 ESC key
Touch to cancel the control mode of func-
tions.
6 Back key
Touch to return to the previous display.
1 Touch AV Menu to display MENU.
The menu names are displayed and operable
ones are highlighted.
# When AV Menu is not displayed, you can dis-
play it by touching the screen.
2 Touch the desired key to display the
function names you want to operate.
3 Touch ESC to return to the display of
each source.
Operating the scroll bar and the
scrubber bar
¨¨¨
´
This unit features touch operation of scroll bar
and scrubber bar.
If the menu has multiple pages or list has
more than five selections, you can drag the
scroll bar on the left side of the menu to view
the hidden objects. For the disc and USB sto-
rage device operation, you can specify the
playback point by dragging the scrubber bar.
Scroll bar operation
1 Scroll bar
Basic Operations
En
13
Section
04
B
a
s
i
c
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
% If you see the scroll bar on the left side
of the screen, drag upward or downward
to view the hidden object.
# Touching or can also display the hidden
object.
Scrubber bar operation
This operation is available for the following
sources:
! DVD-video, DVD-VR
! Video CD
! CD
! Compressed audio files (disc/USB)
! DivX
2 Scrubber bar
% Drag the scrubber bar on the screen to
specify the playback point.
# Drag operation is not available when the
scrubber bar is grayout.
Adjusting the LCD panel angle
CAUTION
Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when
opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be
especially cautious of children’s hands and fin-
gers.
1 Press hto display the ejecting menu.
2 Touch or to adjust the LCD
panel to an easily viewable angle.
# LCD display angle can be adjusted to 5 differ-
ent positions.
# The adjusted LCD panel angle will be memor-
ized and automatically returned to the next time
the LCD panel is opened.
Built-in DVD player basic
operations
Playing a disc
1 Press hto display the ejecting menu.
2 Touch to open the LCD panel.
Disc loading slot appears.
# When a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) is loaded
in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select Disc.
3 Insert a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) into
the disc loading slot.
LCD panel is closed automatically, and play-
back will start.
Disc loading slot
# Be sure to turn up the label side of a DVD
(-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW).
# After a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) has been
inserted, use touch panel keys to select the DVD
player.
# When a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) is loaded
in this unit, touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select Disc.
# If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu
may appear. Refer to Operating the DVD menu on
page 23 and PBC playback on page 28.
# When the automatic playback function is on,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati-
cally start playback from the first chapter of the
first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on
page 26.
# You can eject a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) by
pressing h, and then touching .
Basic Operations
En
14
Section
04
Notes
! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm
DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) at a time. Playing
back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this
unit.
! Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/-
RW), CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot.
! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re-
sumes from the selected point. For more de-
tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on
page 24.
! If a DVD (-R/-RW), CD (-R/-RW) contains a mix-
ture of various media file types such as DivX
and MP3, you can switch between media file
types to play. Refer to Switching the media file
type on this page.
! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if
after you insert a disc the disc does not play,
check that the label side of the disc is up.
Press hand then touch to eject the disc,
and check the disc for damage before insert-
ing it again.
! There is sometimes a delay between starting
up disc playback and the sound being issued.
When being read, Format Read is displayed.
! If an error message is displayed, refer to Error
messages on page 89.
Basic playback controls
The table below shows the basic controls for
playing discs. The following chapters cover
other playback features in more details.
Key What it does
f
Starts playback, pauses a disc that’s playing
or restarts a paused disc.
g Stops playback.
o
Skips to the start of the current track, chapter
or file, then to previous tracks/chapters/files.
! Performs fast reverse by touching and
holding o.
p
Skips to the next track, chapter or file.
! Performs fast forward by touching and
holding p.
Note
You may find with some DVD or Video CD discs
that some playback controls do not work in cer-
tain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction.
Switching the media file type
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types such as DivX and
MP3, you can switch between media file types
to play.
! This unit allows playback of the following
media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM
discs.
— Audio data (CD-DA)
— Compressed audio files
— DivX video files
— JPEG picture files
! In case of DVD-R/RW/ROM, this unit does
not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA)
or JPEG picture files.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Touch Media repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA))—ROM-Audio (com-
pressed audio)—DivX (DivX video files)—
JPEG (JPEG picture files)
Basic Operations
En
15
Section
04
B
a
s
i
c
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
Listening to the radio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
· ' ·
RDS
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
· |
Non-RDS or MW/LW
These are the basic steps necessary to operate
the radio. More advanced tuner operation is
explained starting in the following section.
Refer to page 18.
! This unit’s AF (alternative frequencies
search) function can be turned on and off.
AF should be off for normal tuning opera-
tion (refer to page 18).
! RDS (radio data system) contains inaudible
information that helps search for the radio
stations.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to,
MW/LW or FM.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
4 Program service name
Shows the name of broadcast program (pro-
gram service name).
5 NEWS indicator
Appears when the set news program is re-
ceived.
6 TRFC indicator
Appears when a TP station is tuned in.
7 Text indicator
Shows when the radio text is received.
8 5(stereo) indicator
Appears when the selected frequency is
being broadcast in stereo.
9 Frequency indicator
Shows the frequency to which the tuner is
tuned.
a Local indicator
Appears when local seek tuning is on.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Radio to select the radio.
2 Touch Band to select a band.
Touch Band until the desired band (FM1,
FM2, FM3 for FM or MW/LW) is displayed.
3 To perform manual tuning, briefly
touch c or d.
# You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing c or d (TRACK).
4 To perform seek tuning, keep touching
c or d for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception is
found.
# You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching
either c or d.
# If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta-
tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release
the key.
# You can also perform seek tuning by pressing
and holding c or d (TRACK).
Radio
En
16
Section
05
Notes
! Listening MW/LW radio while an iPod is
charged from this unit may generate noise. In
this case, disconnect the iPod from this unit.
! RDS service may not be provided by all sta-
tions.
! RDS functions such as AF and TA are only ac-
tive when your radio is tuned to an RDS
station.
Storing and recalling
broadcast frequencies
You can easily store up to six broadcast fre-
quencies for later recall.
! Six stations for each band can be stored in
memory.
1 Touch List to display the preset list.
2 When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory keep touching
one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the
beep sounds.
The selected radio station frequency has been
stored in memory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key the radio station frequency is recalled
from memory.
# When P1 to P6 are not displayed, you can dis-
play them by touching List.
# You can also use a and b to recall radio sta-
tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys
P1 to P6.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Displaying the PTY
information
PTY (program type ID code) information can
be displayed.
% Touch INFO.
PTY is displayed for eight seconds.
PTY (program type ID code) information is
listed in the following section. Refer to page
20.
Using radio text
This tuner can display radio text data trans-
mitted by RDS stations, such as station infor-
mation, the name of the currently broadcast
song and the name of the artist.
! The tuner automatically memorizes the
three latest radio text broadcasts received,
replacing text from the least recent recep-
tion with new text when it is received.
Displaying radio text
You can display the currently received radio
text and the three most recent radio texts.
1 Touch Text to display radio text.
Radio text for the currently broadcasting sta-
tion is displayed.
# You can cancel radio text display by touching
ESC.
# When no radio text is received, No Text ap-
pears in the display.
2 Touch PREV or NEXT to recall the three
most recent radio texts.
# If there is no radio text data in memory the dis-
play will not change.
Storing and recalling radio text
You can store data from up to six radio text
transmissions for keys Memo 1 to Memo 6.
1 Display the radio text you want to
store in memory.
Refer to Displaying radio text on this page.
2 Touch any keys Memo 1 to Memo 6 and
hold to store the selected radio text.
The memory number will display and the se-
lected radio text will be stored in memory.
The next time you press the same button in
the radio text display the stored text is recalled
from memory.
Radio
En
17
Section
05
R
a
d
i
o
Introduction of advanced
tuner operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the frequency
display.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Storing the strongest
broadcast frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) automatically
stores the six strongest broadcast frequencies
in the order of their signal strength.
! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using P1 to P6.
% Touch BSM on the function menu to
turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in
order of their signal strength. When finished,
BSM stops flashing.
# To cancel the storage process, touch BSM
again.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals
for good reception.
% Touch Local on the function menu to
set the sensitivity.
Touch Local repeatedly until the desired level
of sensitivity appears in the display.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for MW/LW:
FM: Off—Level1—Level2—Level3—Level4
MW/LW: Off—Level1—Level2
Larger setting number is higher level. The
highest level setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings let
you receive progressively weaker stations.
Selecting alternative
frequencies
When the tuner cannot get a good reception,
the unit automatically searches for a different
station in the same network.
% Touch AF on the function menu to turn
AF on.
# To turn AF off, touch AF again.
Notes
! Only RDS stations are tuned in during seek
tuning or BSM when AF is on.
! When you recall a preset station, the tuner
may update the preset station with a new fre-
quency from the station’s AF list. (This is only
available when using presets on the FM1 or
FM2 bands.) No preset number appears on
the display if the RDS data for the station re-
ceived differs from that for the originally
stored station.
! Sound may be temporarily interrupted by an-
other program during an AF frequency
search.
! AF can be turned on or off independently for
each FM band.
Using PI Seek
If the tuner cannot find a suitable station, or
reception status becomes bad, the unit auto-
matically searches for a different station with
the same programming. During the search,
PI Seek is displayed and the output is muted.
Radio
En
18
Section
05
Using Auto PI Seek for preset
stations
When preset stations cannot be recalled, as
when travelling long distances, the unit can
be set to perform PI Seek during preset recall.
! The default setting for Auto PI Seek is off.
Refer to Switching Auto PI Seek on page 55.
Limiting stations to regional
programming
When AF is used, the regional function limits
the selection of stations broadcasting regional
programs.
% Touch Regional on the function menu
to turn the regional function on.
# To turn the regional function off, touch
Regional again.
Notes
! Regional programming and regional networks
are organized differently depending on the
country (i.e., they may change according to
the hour, state or broadcast area).
! The preset number may disappear from the
display if the tuner tunes in a regional station
which differs from the originally set station.
! The regional function can be turned on or off
independently for each FM band.
Receiving traffic
announcements
TA (traffic announcement standby) lets you re-
ceive traffic announcements automatically, no
matter what source you are listening to. TA
can be activated for both a TP station (a sta-
tion that broadcasts traffic information) or an
enhanced other network’s TP station (a station
carrying information which cross-references
TP stations).
1 Tune in a TP or enhanced other net-
work’s TP station.
TRFC indicator lights.
2 Touch TA on the function menu.
dTRFC appears in the display. Traffic an-
nouncement standby is now on.
# If you turned TA function on while tuned in to
neither a TP nor an enhanced other network’s TP
station, dimmed TRFC indicator lights.
# To turn traffic announcements standby off,
touch TA again.
3 Press +/– (VOLUME) to adjust the TA vo-
lume when a traffic announcement begins.
The newly set volume is stored in memory and
recalled for subsequent traffic announce-
ments.
4 Touch TA while a traffic announcement
is being received to cancel the announce-
ment.
The tuner returns to the original source but re-
mains in the standby mode until TA is touched
again.
Notes
! The system switches back to the original
source following traffic announcement recep-
tion.
! Only TP and enhanced other network’s TP sta-
tions are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM
when TA is on.
Radio
En
19
Section
05
R
a
d
i
o
Using PTY functions
You can tune in a station by using PTY (pro-
gram type) information.
Searching for an RDS station by
PTY information
You can search for general types of broadcast-
ing programs, such as those listed in the fol-
lowing section. Refer to this page.
1 Touch PTY on the function menu.
2 Touch c or d to select a program type.
There are four program types:
News&Inf—Popular—Classics—Others
3 Touch d to begin the search.
The unit searches for a station broadcasting
that program type. When a station is found, its
program service name is displayed.
PTY (program type ID code) information is
listed in the following section. Refer to this
page.
# To cancel the search, touch c.
# The program of some stations may differ from
that indicated by the transmitted PTY.
# If no station is broadcasting the type of pro-
gram you searched for, Not Found is displayed
for about two seconds and then the tuner returns
to the original station.
Using news program interruption
When a news program is broadcast from a
PTY code news station, the unit can switch
from any station to the news broadcast sta-
tion. When the news program ends, reception
of the previous program resumes.
% Touch NEWS on the function menu.
News program interruption standby is now on.
# To turn off news program interruption, touch
NEWS again.
# A news program can be canceled by touching
NEWS.
Receiving PTYalarm broadcasts
When the emergency PTY code broadcasts,
the unit receives it automatically (ALARM ap-
pears). When the broadcasting ends, the sys-
tem returns to the previous source.
PTY list
General Specific Type of program
News&Inf News News
Affairs Current affairs
Info General information and
advice
Sport Sports
Weather Weather reports/meteoro-
logical information
Finance Stock market reports,
commerce, trading, etc.
Popular Pop Mus Popular music
Rock Mus Contemporary modern
music
Easy Mus Easy listening music
Oth Mus Non-categorized music
Jazz Jazz
Country Country music
Nat Mus National music
Oldies Oldies, golden oldies
Folk Mus Folk music
Classics L. Class Light classical music
Classic Classical music
Radio
En
20
Section
05
Others Educate Educational programs
Drama Radio plays and serials
Culture National or regional cul-
ture
Science Nature, science and tech-
nology
Varied Light entertainment
Children Children’s
Social Social affairs
Religion Religious affairs or ser-
vices
Phone In Phone in
Touring Travel programs; not for
traffic announcements
Leisure Hobbies and recreational
activities
Document Documentaries
Radio
En
21
Section
05
R
a
d
i
o
Watching a DVD
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
' · · ·
DVD video
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
' | ·
DVD-VR
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
DVD with your DVD player. More advanced
DVD operation is explained starting in the fol-
lowing section. Refer to page 26.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Title number indicator
Shows the title currently playing.
3 Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent chapter.
5 Audio language indicator
Shows which audio language has been se-
lected.
For DVD-VR, only the number of the audio
language is displayed.
6 Digital format indicator
Shows when a signal encoded in the corre-
sponding format is detected.
7 Channel/sampling frequency/quantiza-
tion bits
Depending on the file format, some informa-
tion may not be displayed.
8 Subtitle language indicator
Shows which subtitle language has been
selected.
9 Viewing angle indicator
Shows which viewing angle has been se-
lected.
a Playing method indicator
Shows which playing method
(ORIGINAL LIST or PLAYLIST) has been se-
lected.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 14.)
# With some discs, a menu may be displayed.
(Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next
page.)
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
3 To skip back or forward to another
chapter, touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching oonce skips to the start
of the current chapter. Touching it again will
skip to the previous chapter.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
chapter by pressing c or d (TRACK).
Playing DVD discs
En
22
Section
06
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
If you keep touching oor pfor five sec-
onds, the icon mor nis highlighted.
When this happens, fast reverse/fast forward
continues even if you release oor p. To
resume playback at a desired point, touch
f.
# Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible
at certain locations on some discs. If this hap-
pens, normal playback automatically resumes.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
Selecting titles from the
title list
Title list lets you see the list of titles on a disc
and select one of them to play back.
! This function is available for DVD-VR.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite title.
That selection will begin to play.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Displaying information of
DVD-VR
Information of DVD-VR can be displayed.
! This function is available for DVD-VR.
% Touch INFO.
Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the
following settings:
Indicators—title name
# If specific information has not been recorded
on a DVD-VR disc, No xxxx will be displayed
(e.g., No Title).
# If the characters recorded on the disc are not
compatible with this unit, those characters will
not be displayed.
Skipping back or forward
to another title
% To skip back or forward to another title,
touch a or b.
Touching a skips to the start of the next title.
Touching b skips to the start of the previous
title.
Title numbers are displayed for eight sec-
onds.
Operating the DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc
contents using a menu.
! This function is available for DVD video.
! You can display the menu by touching
Menu or Top Menu while a disc is playing.
Touching either of these keys again lets you
start playback from the location selected
from the menu. For details, refer to the in-
structions provided with the disc.
Using DVD menu direct touch
control
This function allows you to operate the DVD
menu by touching the menu item directly.
% Touch the desired menu item on the
DVD menu directly.
# Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this
function may not work properly. In this case,
using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu.
Using the touch panel keys
1 Touch to display touch panel keys
to operate the DVD menu.
# When the touch panel keys are not displayed,
you can display them by touching the screen.
# To switch to the DVD menu direct touch con-
trol, touch Touch.
2 Touch a, b, c or d to select the desired
menu item.
Playing DVD discs
En
23
Section
06
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
V
D
d
i
s
c
s
3 Touch .
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
# The way to display the menu differs depending
on the disc.
Selecting the play mode
You have two methods for playing DVD-VR
disc; ORIGINAL LIST (original) and PLAYLIST
(playlist).
! Titles created with DVD recorders are
called original. Based on original, rear-
ranged titles are called playlist. Playlists
are created on DVD-R/RW discs.
! This function is available for DVD-VR.
% Touch Mode Change to switch the play
mode.
If the play mode is changed, playback starts
from the beginning of the selected play
mode.
Resume playback (Bookmark)
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the
disc is loaded.
! This function is available for DVD video.
% During playback, touch Bookmark at
the point you want to resume playback
next time.
The selected scene will be bookmarked so that
playback resumes from that point next time.
# To clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch-
ing Bookmark during playback.
# You can also bookmark a disc by pressing and
holding hat the point you want to bookmark.
Next time you load the disc, playback will resume
from the bookmarked point. Note that you can
only bookmark one disc using this method. To
clear the bookmark on a disc, press h.
# You can bookmark up to six discs including
the disc that is bookmarked using h.
# The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new
one.
CM skip/CM back
This function skips a reproduced image for a
specified time. If the currently playing disc
contains commercials, it is possible to skip
them.
% To skip progressively backward or for-
ward, touch or .
Each time you touch or it changes steps
in the following order:
CM back
5 sec.—15 sec.—30 sec.—1.0 min.—2.0
min.—3.0 min.—0 sec.
CM skip
30 sec.—1.0 min.—1.5 min.—2.0 min.—3.0
min.—5.0 min.—10.0 min.—0 sec.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
% Touch rduring playback.
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one
frame.
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
# With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing frame-by-frame playback.
# If a DVD-VR disc contains a still image, touch
rwhile displaying a still image to switch to the
next image or video.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
% Keep touching runtil is displayed
during playback.
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion
playback begins.
# Touching qor rduring slow motion play-
back, you can change the playback speed in four
steps as follows:
1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
Playing DVD discs
En
24
Section
06
Notes
! There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
! With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing slow motion playback.
! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Searching for the part you
want to play
You can use the search function to find the
part you want to play.
For DVD video, you can select Title (title),
Chapter (chapter), Time (time) or 10key (nu-
meric keypad).
For DVD-VR, you can select Title (title),
Chapter (chapter) or Time (time).
! Chapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
1 Touch Search.
2 Touch the desired search option (e.g.,
Chapter).
3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
# In the time search function, to select 1 hour
11 minutes, convert the time into 071 minutes 00
seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order.
4 Touch .
This starts playback from the selected part.
Note
With discs featuring a menu, you can also touch
Menu or Top Menu and then make selections
from the displayed menu.
Changing audio language
during playback (Multi-audio)
DVDs can provide audio playback with differ-
ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di-
gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi-
audio recordings, you can switch between lan-
guages/audio systems during playback.
% Touch Audio during playback.
Each time you touch Audio it switches be-
tween audio systems.
Notes
! With some DVDs, switching between lan-
guages/audio systems may only be possible
using a menu display.
! You can also switch between languages/audio
systems using Setup. For details, refer to Set-
ting the audio language on page 50.
! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If
this unit’s optical digital outputs are not con-
nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select
an audio setting other than DTS.
! Display indications such as Dolby D and
5.1 ch indicate the audio system recorded on
the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback
may not be with the same audio system as
that indicated.
! Touching Audio during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns
you to normal playback.
Playing DVD discs
En
25
Section
06
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
V
D
d
i
s
c
s
Changing the subtitle
language during playback
(Multi-subtitle)
With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings,
you can switch between subtitle languages
during playback.
% Touch Subtitle during playback.
Each time you touch Subtitle it switches be-
tween subtitle languages.
Notes
! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle
languages may only be possible using a menu
display.
! You can also switch between subtitle lan-
guages using Setup. For details, refer to Set-
ting the subtitle language on page 50.
! Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns
you to normal playback.
Changing the viewing angle
during playback (Multi-angle)
With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot
from multiple angles) recordings, you can
switch among viewing angles during play-
back.
! This function is available for DVD video.
! During playback of a scene shot from mul-
tiple angles, the angle icon is dis-
played. Turn angle icon display on or off
using Setup. For details, refer to Setting the
angle icon display on page 51.
% Touch Angle during playback of a scene
shot from multiple angles.
Note
Touching Angle during fast forward/fast reverse,
pause or slow motion playback returns you to
normal playback.
Return to the specified scene
You can return to the specified scene where
the DVD you are currently playing has been
preprogrammed to return.
! This function is available for DVD video.
% Touch Return to return to the specified
scene.
# If a specified scene has not been prepro-
grammed in DVD disc, this function is not possi-
ble.
Automatic playback of DVDs
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter
of the first title.
! This function is available for DVD video.
! Some DVDs may not operate properly. If
this function is not fully operated, turn this
function off and start playback.
% Touch Auto Play to turn automatic play-
back on.
# To turn automatic playback off, touch
Auto Play again.
# When the automatic playback is on, you can-
not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to
Repeating play on the next page).
Introduction of advanced
DVD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Playing DVD discs
En
26
Section
06
Repeating play
There are three repeat play ranges for DVD
playback.
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Play through the current disc
! Chapter – Repeat the current chapter
! Title – Repeat the current title
# If you perform chapter search or fast forward/
reverse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.
Selecting audio output
When playing DVD video discs recorded with
LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output.
! This function is not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
! If you select Linear PCM, when playing a
disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you
can operate this function. (Refer to Setting
for digital output on page 53.)
% Touch L/R Select on the function menu
to select the audio output.
Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired
audio output appears in the display.
! L+R – left and right
! Left – left
! Right – right
! Mix – mixing left and right
# Depending on the disc and the playback loca-
tion on the disc, the function may not be select-
able, indicating that operating this function is not
possible.
Playing DVD discs
En
27
Section
06
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
V
D
d
i
s
c
s
Watching a Video CD
´´´ ¨¨¨
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
Video CD with your DVD player. More ad-
vanced Video CD operation is explained start-
ing in the following section. Refer to the next
page.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track playing.
3 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent track.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 14.)
# With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback
control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to
PBC playback on this page.)
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
3 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
track. Touching oonce skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
# During PBC playback, a menu may be dis-
played if you perform these operations.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRACK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
If you keep touching oor pfor five sec-
onds, the icon mor nis highlighted.
When this happens, fast reverse/fast forward
continues even if you release oor p. To
resume playback at a desired point, touch
f.
# Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible
at certain locations on some discs. If this hap-
pens, normal playback automatically resumes.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
PBC playback
During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC
(Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. You
can operate PBC menu with 10key.
1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch
Search and then touch 10key.
# Depending on the discs, the menu may be
two or more pages long. In such case, touch o
or pto display the next or previous menu.
2 Touch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu
number and then touch to start play-
back.
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
3 Touch ESC to hide the touch panel keys.
Notes
! You can display the menu by touching Return
during PBC playback. For details, refer to the
instructions provided with the disc.
! PBC playback of Video CD cannot be can-
celed.
Playing Video CDs
En
28
Section
07
! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC
(Playback Control), PBC ON, search and time
search functions cannot be used nor can you
select the range for repeat play.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
% Touch rduring playback.
Each time you touch r, you move ahead one
frame.
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
# With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
% Keep touching runtil is displayed
during playback.
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion
playback begins.
# Touching qor rduring slow motion play-
back, you can change the playback speed in four
steps as follows:
1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2
# To return to normal playback, touch f.
Notes
! There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
! With some discs, images may be unclear dur-
ing slow motion playback.
! Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Searching for a desired
scene, starting playback
from a specified time
You can use the search function to search for
a desired scene by specifying a track, and the
time search function to specify the time on a
disc at which play starts.
! During playback of Video CDs featuring
PBC (playback control), this function can-
not be operated.
! Time search is not possible when disc play-
back has been stopped.
1 Touch Search.
2 Touch Track (track), Time (time) or
10key (numeric keypad).
3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
# In the time search function, to select 1 hour
11 minutes, convert the time into 071 minutes 00
seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order.
4 Touch .
This starts playback from the selected
scene.
Introduction of advanced
Video CD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Playing Video CDs
En
29
Section
07
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
V
i
d
e
o
C
D
s
Repeating play
There are two repeat play ranges for the Video
CD playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc
(disc repeat).
! During playback of Video CDs featuring
PBC (playback control), this function can-
not be operated.
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat the current disc
! Track – Repeat the current track
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.
Selecting audio output
You can switch between stereo and monaural
audio output.
! This function is not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
% Touch L/R Select on the function menu
to select the audio output.
Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired
audio output appears in the display.
! L+R – left and right
! Left – left
! Right – right
! Mix – mixing left and right
Playing Video CDs
En
30
Section
07
Listening to a CD
´´´ ¨¨¨
·
'
·

These are the basic steps necessary to play a
CD with your DVD player. More advanced CD
operation is explained starting in the following
section. Refer to the next page.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track playing.
3 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent track.
4 Disc title indicator
Shows the title of the currently playing disc
only when playing CD TEXT discs.
5 Disc artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the currently play-
ing disc only when playing CD TEXT disc.
6 Track name list display
Shows the track name list only when playing
CD TEXT disc.
7 Track artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the currently play-
ing track only when playing CD TEXT disc.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 14.)
2 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next
track. Touching oonce skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRACK).
3 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
Note
If specific information has not been recorded on
a CD TEXT disc, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g.,
No Name).
Selecting tracks from the
track title list
Track title list lets you see the list of tracks on
a disc and select one of them to play back.
When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are
displayed.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite track title.
That selection will begin to play.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Playing CDs
En
31
Section
08
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
C
D
s
Switching the media file type
If a disc contains a mixture of various media
file types such as DivX and MP3, you can
switch between media file types to play. Refer
to Switching the media file type on page 15.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Introduction of advanced
CD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Repeating play
There are two repeat play ranges for the CD
playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc (disc
repeat).
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat the current disc
! Track – Repeat the current track
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.
# When playing discs with compressed audio
and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play performs
within the currently playing data type even if Disc
is selected.
Playing tracks in random order
Random play lets you play back tracks on the
CD in a random order.
% Touch Random on the function menu to
turn random play on.
Tracks play in a random order.
# To turn random play off, touch Random
again.
Scanning tracks of a CD
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the CD.
1 Touch Scan on the function menu to
turn scan play on.
The first 10 seconds of each track is played.
2 When you find the desired track touch
Scan again.
# After scanning of a CD is finished, normal
playback of the tracks will begin again.
Playing CDs
En
32
Section
08
Listening to compressed audio
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
'
·

·
·
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
compressed audio with your DVD player. More
advanced compressed audio operation is ex-
plained starting in the following section. Refer
to the next page.
1 Source icon
Shows the media type currently playing.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent file.
5 File name indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
file.
6 Album title indicator
Shows the title of the currently playing
album.
7 Artist name indicator
Shows the artist name of the currently play-
ing file.
8 Track title indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
track.
9 Folder name indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
folder.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 14.)
2 Touch a or b to select a folder.
# You cannot select a folder that does not have
a compressed audio file recorded in it.
3 To skip back or forward to another file,
touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next file.
Touching oonce skips to the start of the
current file. Touching it again will skip to the
previous file.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
file by pressing c or d (TRACK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
Notes
! This DVD player can play back a compressed
audio recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-
R/RW/ROM. (Please see the following section
for files that can be played back. Refer to page
95)
! Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If
folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 02.)
! When playing back files recorded as VBR
(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be
correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse
operations are used.
! If specific information has not been recorded
on a compressed audio disc, No xxxx will be
displayed (e.g., No Artist).
Playing compressed audio
En
33
Section
09
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
a
u
d
i
o
! If the characters recorded on the disc are not
compatible with this unit, those characters
will not be displayed.
! Text information may not be correctly dis-
played depending on the recorded en-
vironment.
Selecting files from the file
name list
File name list lets you see the list of file names
(or folder names) and select one of them to
playback.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder
name).
That selection will begin to play.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# When you have selected a folder, a list of the
names of the files (or the folders) in it can be
viewed. Repeat this operation to select the de-
sired file name.
# To return to the previous list (the folder one
level higher), touch Back.
# To return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold
Back. However, if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no
files, playback commences with folder 02.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Switching the media file type
If a disc contains a mixture of various media
file types such as DivX and MP3, you can
switch between media file types to play. Refer
to Switching the media file type on page 15.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Introduction of advanced
compressed audio operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Playing compressed audio
En
34
Section
09
Repeating play
For compressed audio playback, there are
three repeat play ranges: Folder (folder re-
peat), File (one-track repeat) and Disc (repeat
all tracks).
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat all tracks
! File – Repeat the current track
! Folder – Repeat the current folder
# If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to Disc.
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during File, the repeat play range changes
to Folder.
# When Folder is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
# When playing discs with compressed audio
and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play performs
within the currently playing data type even if Disc
is selected.
Playing tracks in random order
Random play lets you play back tracks in a
random order within the repeat range, Folder
and Disc.
% Touch Random on the function menu to
turn random play on.
Tracks will play in a random order within the
previously selected Folder or Disc ranges.
# To turn random play off, touch Random
again.
Scanning folders and tracks
While you are using Folder, the beginning of
each track in the selected folder plays for
about 10 seconds. When you are using Disc,
the beginning of the first track of each folder
is played for about 10 seconds.
1 Touch Scan on the function menu to
turn scan play on.
The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur-
rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is
played.
2 When you find the desired track (or
folder) touch Scan again.
# After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.
Playing compressed audio
En
35
Section
09
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
a
u
d
i
o
Watching a DivX/JPEG
´´´ ¨¨¨
'
···
These are the basic steps necessary to play a
DivX/JPEG with your DVD player. More ad-
vanced DivX/JPEG operation is explained start-
ing in the following section. Refer to page 39.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent file.
! When playing a JPEG disc, play time in-
dicator does not appear.
5 File name indicator
Shows the name of the currently playing
file.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot se-
lect Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit.
(Refer to page 14.)
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
3 Touch a or b to select a folder.
# You cannot select a folder that does not have
a DivX/JPEG file recorded in it.
4 To skip back or forward to another file,
touch oor p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next file.
Touching oonce skips to the start of the
current file. Touching it again will skip to the
previous file.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
file by pressing c or d (TRACK).
5 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
When DivX disc is playing, if you keep touch-
ing oor pfor five seconds, the icon m
or nis highlighted. When this happens, fast
reverse/fast forward continues even if you re-
lease oor p. To resume playback at a de-
sired point, touch f.
# This is fast forward and reverse operation only
for the file being played. This operation is can-
celed when the previous or next file is reached.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
# When playing JPEG file, performing this op-
eration enables you to search every 10 files.
Notes
! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re-
corded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/
ROM. (Please see the following section for
files that can be played back. Refer to page
97.)
! This unit can play back a JPEG file recorded
on CD-R/RW/ROM or USB storage device.
(Please see the following section for files that
can be played back. Refer to page 97.)
! Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If
folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 02.)
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
36
Section
10
Viewing a JPEG slideshow
When loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing
JPEG picture files, this unit automatically
starts a slideshow from the first folder/picture
on the disc. The player displays the pictures in
each folder in alphabetical order.
The table below shows the controls for viewing
a slideshow.
Key What it does
f
Starts the slideshow, pauses the slideshow or
restarts a paused disc.
o Displays the previous picture.
p Displays the next picture.
Rotates the displayed picture 90° clockwise.
Playing DivX
®
VOD content
Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content
may only be playable a fixed number of times.
When you load a disc containing this type of
DivX VOD content, the remaining number of
plays is shown on-screen and you then have
the option of playing the disc (thereby using
up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If
you load a disc that contains expired DivX
VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), Rental Expired. is dis-
played.
! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim-
ited number of plays, then you may load
the disc into your player and play the con-
tent as often as you like, and no message
will be displayed.
! Playable number of times is displayed with
Remaining Views:.
Important
! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit,
you first need to register the unit with your
DivX VOD content provider. About your regis-
tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX
®
VOD registration code on page 53.
! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di-
gital Rights Management) system. This re-
stricts playback of content to specific,
registered devices.
% If the message is displayed after load-
ing a disc containing DivX VOD content,
touch Play.
Playback of the DivX VOD content will start.
# To skip to the next file, touch Next Play.
# If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con-
tent, touch Stop.
Selecting files from the file
name list
File name list lets you see the list of file names
(or folder names) and select one of them to
playback.
1 Touch List.
2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder
name).
That selection will begin to play.
# When you have selected a folder, a list of the
names of the files (or the folders) in it can be
viewed. Repeat this operation to select the de-
sired file name.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# To return to the previous list (the folder one
level higher), touch Back.
3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
37
Section
10
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
i
v
X
/
J
P
E
G
f
i
l
e
s
Displaying text information
on DivX/JPEG disc
Text information recorded on a DivX/JPEG disc
can be displayed.
% Touch INFO.
Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the
following settings:
Folder Name (folder name)—File Name (file
name)
# If the characters recorded on the disc are not
compatible with this unit, those characters will
not be displayed.
Pausing playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Switching the media file type
If a disc contains a mixture of various media
file types such as DivX and MP3, you can
switch between media file types to play. Refer
to Switching the media file type on page 15.
% Touch Media to switch between media
file types.
Searching for the part you
want to play
You can use the time search function to speci-
fy the time on a disc at which play starts.
! This function is available for DivX disc.
! This function is not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
1 Touch Search.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired num-
ber.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
# To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time
into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0
and 0 in that order.
3 Touch .
This starts playback from the selected part.
Changing audio language
during playback (Multi-audio)
You can switch audio language during play-
back when playing a file recorded with dialog
in two or more languages.
! This function is available for DivX disc.
% Touch Audio during playback.
Each time you touch Audio it switches be-
tween audio systems.
# Touching Audio during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you
to normal playback.
Changing the subtitle
language during playback
(Multi-subtitle)
You can switch subtitle language during play-
back when playing file recorded with subtitles
in one or more languages.
! This function is available for DivX disc.
% Touch Subtitle during playback.
Each time you touch Subtitle it switches be-
tween subtitle languages.
# Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast re-
verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you
to normal playback.
Capture an image in JPEG files
Image data can be captured in order to use it
for wallpaper. Images can be stored in this
unit, and recall easily.
! This function is available for JPEG disc.
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
38
Section
10
! This unit can store only one image data.
Old image is overwitten with new one.
1 Touch fto pause the slideshow
when the desired image is displayed.
2 Touch Capture.
Captureing the image is displayed.
3 When Do you save this image? is dis-
played, touch Yes.
While storing the image to this unit, Saving
the image Don't switch off the battery. is
displayed. After stored completely, Image
saved is displayed.
# To cancel the strorage process, touch No.
Introduction of advanced
DivX/JPEG operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Repeating play
For DivX video file playback, there are three re-
peat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat), File
(file repeat) and Disc (repeat all files).
For JPEG picture file playback, there are two
repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat) and
Disc (repeat all files).
% Touch Repeat on the function menu to
select the repeat range.
! Disc – Repeat all files
! Folder – Repeat the current folder
! File – Repeat just the current file
# If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to Disc.
# If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during File, the repeat play range changes
to Folder.
# When Folder is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
Playing files in random order
When playing a JPEG disc, random play lets
you play back files in a random order within
the repeat range, Folder and Disc.
! This function is available for JPEG disc.
% Touch Random on the function menu to
turn random play on.
Files will play in a random order within the pre-
viously selected Folder or Disc ranges.
# To turn random play off, touch Random
again.
Playing DivX/JPEG files
En
39
Section
10
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
D
i
v
X
/
J
P
E
G
f
i
l
e
s
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨
'
···
For details about the supported device, refer to
Portable audio player compatibility on page 8.
Operation of JPEG in a USB storage device is
the same as JPEG on a disc.
1 Source icon
Shows the media type currently playing.
2 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
! Last four-digit can be displayed as the
file number.
4 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur-
rent file.
5 Song information
Shows detailed information of currently
playing song.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
USB to select the USB.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
2 Touch a or b to select a folder.
# You cannot select a folder that does not have
a compressed audio file recorded in it.
3 To skip back or forward to another
compressed audio file, briefly touch oor
p.
Touching pskips to the start of the next file.
Touching oonce skips to the start of the
current file. Touching it again will skip to the
previous file.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
file by pressing c or d (TRACK).
Notes
! Optimum performance of this unit may not be
obtained depending on the connected USB
portable audio player/USB memory.
! If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 02.
! If an error message or icon is displayed, refer
to Error messages on page 89.
! When the USB portable audio player having
battery charging function is connected to this
unit and the ignition switch is set to ACC or
ON, the battery is charged.
! You can disconnect the USB portable audio
player/USB memory anytime you want to fin-
ish listening to it.
! If USB portable audio player/USB memory is
connected to this unit, the source is changed
to USB automatically. If you do not use an
USB device, disconnect it from this unit. De-
pending on the connected USB device, turn-
ing on the ignition switch while USB device is
connected to this unit may change the source
automatically.
! If the characters recorded on the audio file are
not compatible with this unit, those charac-
ters will not be displayed.
! Text information may not be correctly dis-
played depending on the recorded en-
vironment.
Playing songs in a USB storage device
En
40
Section
11
Selecting files from the file
name list
The operation is the same as that of the built-
in DVD player.
Refer to Selecting files from the file name list
on page 34.
Pausing compressed audio
playback
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Switching the media file type
The operation is the same as that of the built-
in DVD player.
If a USB portable audio player/USB memory
contains compressed audio files and JPEG
file, you can switch between media file types
to play. Refer to Switching the media file type
on page 15.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Function and operation
Repeat, Random and Scan operations are ba-
sically the same as that of the built-in DVD
player.
Function name Operation
Repeat
Refer to Repeating play on page 35.
However, the repeat play ranges
you can select are different from
that of the built-in DVD player. The
repeat play ranges of the USB por-
table audio player/USB memory
are:
! File – Repeat just the current
file
! Folder – Repeat the current
folder
! All – Repeat all files
Random
Refer to Playing tracks in random
order on page 35.
Scan
Refer to Scanning folders and
tracks on page 35.
Notes
! If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to All.
! If you perform track search or fast forward/re-
verse during File, the repeat play range
changes to Folder.
! When Folder is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
! After file or folder scanning is finished, nor-
mal playback of the files begins again.
Playing songs in a USB storage device
En
41
Section
11
P
l
a
y
i
n
g
s
o
n
g
s
i
n
a
U
S
B
s
t
o
r
a
g
e
d
e
v
i
c
e
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
'
! You can use this unit to control an iPod by
using a cable (e.g., CD-IU50), which is sold
separately.
! If an iPod with video capabilities is con-
nected to this unit via interface cable (e.g.
CD-IU200V), which is sold separately, you
can enjoy the video contents of the iPod as
the iPod source. In this case, set the AUX1
to iPod. Refer to Switching the auxiliary set-
ting on page 54.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Repeat indicator
Shows when repeat range is set to or .
3 Song number indicator
Up to 65 535 can be displayed as the song
number.
4 Shuffle indicator
Shows when random play is set to Songs or
Albums.
5 Song information
Shows detailed information of currently
playing song.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
iPod to select the iPod.
While connected to this unit, PIONEER, Acces-
sory Attached or (check mark) is displayed
on the iPod.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.
# Before connecting the dock connector of this
unit to the iPod, disconnect the headphones from
the iPod.
# Depending on the model of iPod or the data
size in the iPod, there may be a delay to start play-
ing after connection.
# After the iPod has been connected to this
unit, use touch panel keys to select the iPod.
# When removing the iPod from this unit, this
unit is turned off.
2 To skip back or forward to another
song, touch oor p.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
song/video by pressing c or d (TRACK).
3 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
When video is playing, if you keep touching
oor pfor five seconds, the icon mor
nis highlighted. When this happens, fast
reverse/fast forward continues even if you re-
lease oor p. To resume playback at a de-
sired point, touch f.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
4 When playing a file with chapter, touch
oor pto select a chapter.
Notes
! Read the precautions for iPod in the following
section. Refer to page 97.
! If an error message or icon is displayed, refer
to Error messages on page 89.
! Connect directly the dock connector cable to
the iPod so that this unit works properly.
! When the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON,
the iPod’s battery is charged while the iPod is
connected to this unit.
! While the iPod is connected to this unit, the
iPod cannot be turned on or off.
! The iPod is turned off about two minutes after
the ignition switch is set to OFF.
! If specific information is not recorded on the
iPod, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g.,
No Name).
Using iPod
En
42
Section
12
! If the characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this unit, those characters
are not displayed.
! This unit can display the album art. While
loading the album art information from iPod,
functions may not work properly.
— List operation may not function promptly.
— Time display and actual time may not
match.
If many songs and album art have been stored
in iPod, loading may take long time.
Playing video
This unit can play video if an iPod with video
capabilities is connected.
! To pause video playback, touch MENU.
! This unit can play back “Movies”, “Music vi-
deos”, “Video Podcast” and “TV show”
which are downloaded from iTunes store.
! Change the video setting on the iPod so
that the iPod can output the video to an ex-
ternal device, before you display the video
screen.
! iPod video image is not displayed on the
PAL rear monitor.
— When the control mode is set to iPod, it
is possible to change the signal be-
tween PAL and NTSC from iPod.
— When the control mode is set to this
unit, it is not possible to display the
video on the PAL monitor.
— For about control mode, see the follow-
ing section. Refer to Operating this
unit’s iPod function from your iPod on
page 45.
! For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.
1 Touch MENU to display iPod menus.
2 Touch Video.
# To return to the music operation screen, touch
Music.
3 Play video on the iPod.
Browsing for a song/video
Operations to control an iPod with this unit is
designed to be as close to the iPod as possible
to make operation and song/video search
easy.
! If the characters recorded on the iPod are
not compatible with this unit, those charac-
ters are not displayed.
Searching songs/videos by
category
1 Touch MENU to display iPod menus.
2 Touch one of the categories in which
you want to search for a song/video.
When browsing for a song
! Playlists (playlists)
! Artists (artists)
! Albums (albums)
! Songs (songs)
! Podcasts (podcasts)
! Genres (genres)
! Composers (composers)
! Audiobooks (audiobooks)
When browsing for a video
! Video Playlists (video playlists)
! Movies (movies)
! Music Videos (music videos)
! Video Podcasts (video podcasts)
! TV Shows (TV shows)
3 Touch a list title that you want to play.
Repeat this operation until you find the de-
sired song/video.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# To return to the previous menu, touch Back.
4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Using iPod
En
43
Section
12
U
s
i
n
g
i
P
o
d
Searching by alphabet in the list
1 Select a category. (Refer to Searching
songs/videos by category on the previous
page.)
2 When a list for the selected category is
displayed, touch ABC to switch to alphabet
search mode.
Alphabet search mode is displayed.
3 Touch c or d to select the first letter
you are looking for.
4 Touch to show entries starting with
the letter you chose.
While searching, Searching flashes. In this
condition, touch panel key operation is not
available.
# To refine the search with a different letter,
touch Cancel.
5 Touch a list title that you want to play.
Repeat this operation until you find the de-
sired song/video.
# You can start playback throughout the se-
lected list by touching .
# To return to the previous menu, touch Back.
Displaying text
information on iPod Video
% Touch INFO.
Song Title (song title)—Artist Name (artist
name)—Album Title (album title)
# If specific information is not recorded on the
iPod, No xxxx will be displayed (e.g., No Name).
# If the characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this unit, those characters are
not displayed.
Pausing a song
% Touch fduring playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch fagain.
Using advanced sound
retriever
Advanced sound retriever function automati-
cally enhances compressed audio and re-
stores rich sound.
% Touch ASR repeatedly to select the de-
sired setting.
Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2
# ASR2 is more effective than ASR1.
Note
When you use this unit with a multi-channel pro-
cessor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced
sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2, the vo-
lume will become slightly lower. The volume will
become much lower for ASR2 than it will for
ASR1. Take care when you increase the volume
for ASR2 and then switch to Off, because the vo-
lume will suddenly seem much louder.
Repeating play
For playback of the songs/videos on the iPod,
there are two repeat play ranges: (repeat
one song/video) and (repeat all songs/vi-
deos in the list).
! While repeat play range is set to , you
cannot select the other songs/videos. How-
ever, you can select other songs/videos
while browsing.
% Touch to select the repeat range.
! – Repeat just the current song/video
! – Repeat all songs/videos in the selected
list
Using iPod
En
44
Section
12
Playing songs/videos in a
random order (shuffle)
For playback of songs/videos on the iPod,
there are two random play methods: Songs
(play back songs/videos in a random order)
and Albums (play back albums in a random
order).
% Touch to select the random play
method.
! Songs – Play back songs/videos in the se-
lected list in random order.
! Albums – Play back songs/videos from a
randomly selected album in order.
# To cancel the random play, touch repeat-
edly until the shuffle icon is turned off.
Playing all songs in a
random order (shuffle all)
This method plays all songs on the iPod ran-
domly.
% Touch to turn shuffle all on.
All songs on the iPod play randomly.
Operating this unit’s iPod
function from your iPod
This unit’s iPod function can be operated from
your iPod. Sound can be heard from the car’s
speakers, and operation can be conducted
from your iPod.
! While this function is in use, even if the
ignition key is turned off, the iPod will not
be turned off. To turn off power, operate the
iPod.
1 Touch to switch the control mode
to iPod.
# Touching switches the control mode to
this unit.
# Even if this function is performed, track up/
down, chapter up/down, fast forward/reverse and
play/pause can be operated from this unit. Also,
it is possible to display the text information while
playing back video.
2 Operate the connected iPod to select a
song/video and play.
Selecting songs from lists
related to the currently
playing song
Lists related to the currently playing song are
displayed. You can select songs from the fol-
lowing lists.
— Album list of currently playing artist
— Song list of currently playing album
— Album list of currently playing genre
! Depending on the number of files in the
iPod, there may be a delay when displaying
a list.
1 Touch Link Play.
Link play selection screen is displayed.
2 Touch a desired mode.
! Artists – Plays songs related to the cur-
rently playing artist.
! Albums – Plays songs related to the cur-
rently playing album.
! Genres – Plays songs related to the cur-
rently playing genre.
While searching the song, Link Play... flashes.
In this condition, touch panel key operation is
not available.
# If the related albums/songs are not found,
Not Found is displayed.
3 Display returns to the ordinary display
and playback begin.
Changing audiobook speed
While listening to an audiobook on iPod, play-
back speed can be changed.
Using iPod
En
45
Section
12
U
s
i
n
g
i
P
o
d
% Touch Audiobooks to select your favor-
ite setting.
! Faster – Playback faster than normal speed
! Normal – Playback in normal speed
! Slower – Playback slower than normal
speed
Changing the screen mode
While video is playing, you can select the dis-
play mode between widescreen (16:9) and
standard (4:3) screen.
% Touch Wide Screen.
# To switch to standard (4:3) screen, touch
Wide Screen again.
Using iPod
En
46
Section
12
Introduction of audio
adjustments
¨
1 Audio display
Shows the audio adjustment status.
Important
If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is
connected to this unit, the audio function will be
changed to the multi-channel processor’s audio
menu. For details, refer to Introduction of DSP ad-
justments on page 76.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Audio Menu to display the audio function
names.
The audio function names are displayed and
operable ones are highlighted.
# When selecting FM as the source, you cannot
switch to Source Level Adjuster.
# When selecting Bluetooth telephone as the
source, you can only switch to Fader/Balance.
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Using balance adjustment
You can change the fader/balance setting so
that it can provide the ideal listening environ-
ment in all occupied seats.
1 Touch Fader/Balance on the audio func-
tion menu.
2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
# FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only
two speakers are used.
# When the rear output setting is Subwoofer,
you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance.
Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller on page 54.
3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-
er balance.
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to
right.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization
to match the car’s interior acoustic character-
istics as desired.
You can adjust the center frequency and the Q
factor (curve characteristics) of each currently
selected curve band (Low/Mid/High).
! The actual range of the adjustments are dif-
ferent depending on which equalizer curve
is selected.
Level (dB)
Center frequency
Q=2N
Q=2W
Frequency (Hz)
1 Touch Parametric EQ on the audio func-
tion menu.
2 Touch c or d on EQ Select to select the
equalizer.
Display Equalizer curve
Powerful Powerful
Natural Natural
Vocal Vocal
Audio Adjustments
En
47
Section
13
A
u
d
i
o
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
s
Custom Custom
Flat Flat
Super Bass Super bass
# Custom is an adjusted equalizer curve that
you create. If you make adjustments to an equali-
zer curve, the equalizer curve setting is memor-
ized in Custom.
# When Flat is selected, no supplement or cor-
rection is made to the sound. This is useful to
check the effect of the equalizer curves by switch-
ing alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer
curve.
3 Touch c or d on Band to select the
equalizer band to adjust.
Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high)
4 Touch c or d on Frequency to select
the frequency to adjust.
Low: 40Hz—80Hz—100Hz—160Hz
Mid: 200Hz—500Hz—1kHz—2kHz
High: 3.15kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12.5kHz
5 Touch c or d on Q.Factor to select the
Q factor.
2Wide—1Wide—1Narrow—2Narrow
6 Touch a or b to adjust the level of the
equalizer band.
+12 to –12 is displayed as the level is in-
creased or decreased.
# You can then select another band and adjust
the level.
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Touch Loudness on the audio function
menu.
2 Touch d to turn loudness on.
# To turn loudness off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d to select a desired level.
Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high)
Using subwoofer output
This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output
which can be turned on or off.
! When the subwoofer output is on, you can
adjust the cut-off frequency and the output
level of the subwoofer.
1 Touch Subwoofer on the audio function
menu.
2 Touch d next to Sub Woofer to turn
subwoofer output on.
# To turn subwoofer output off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d next to Phase to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
Touch d to select normal phase and Normal
appears in the display. Touch c to select re-
verse phase and Reverse appears in the dis-
play.
4 Touch c or d next to Level to adjust
the output level of the subwoofer.
+6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
5 Touch c or d next to Frequency to se-
lect cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are outputted from the sub-
woofer.
Boosting the bass
Bass boost function boosts the bass level of
sound.
1 Touch Bass Booster on the audio func-
tion menu.
2 Touch c or d to select a desired level.
0 to +6 is displayed as the level is increased or
decreased.
Audio Adjustments
En
48
Section
13
Using the high pass filter
When you do not want low sounds from the
subwoofer output frequency range to play
from the front or rear speakers, turn on the
HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher
than those in the selected range are output
from the front or rear speakers.
1 Touch High Pass Filter on the audio
function menu.
2 Touch d next to High Pass Filter to turn
high pass filter on.
# To turn high pass filter off, touch c.
3 Touch c or d next to Frequency to se-
lect cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz
Only frequencies higher than those in the se-
lected range are output from the front or rear
speakers.
Adjusting source levels
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
! Settings are based on the FM volume level,
which remains unchanged.
1 Compare the FM volume level with the
level of the source you wish to adjust.
2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the
audio function menu.
3 Touch c or d to adjust the source vo-
lume.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the source volume.
+4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Notes
! The MW/LW volume level can also be adjusted
with source level adjustments.
! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX
are set to the same source level adjustment
volume automatically.
! iPod and USB storage device are set to the
same source level adjustment volume auto-
matically.
! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to
the same source level adjustment volume
automatically.
Audio Adjustments
En
49
Section
13
A
u
d
i
o
A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t
s
Introduction of DVD setup
adjustments
¨
1 DVD setup menu display
Shows the DVD setup menu names.
You can use this menu to change audio, subti-
tle, parental lock and other DVD settings.
1 Touch g.
Setup will be displayed instead of Menu.
2 Touch Setup.
The DVD setup function names are displayed.
3 Touch ESC to return to the playback dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Setting the subtitle language
You can set a desired subtitle language. If the
selected subtitle language is recorded on the
DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language.
1 Touch Subtitle Language on the DVD
setup menu.
A subtitle language menu is displayed.
2 Touch the desired language.
A subtitle language is set.
# If you have selected Others, refer to When you
select Others on this page.
Notes
! If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the language specified on the disc is
displayed.
! You can also switch the subtitle language by
touching Subtitle during playback. (Refer to
Changing the subtitle language during play-
back (Multi-subtitle) on page 26.)
! Even if you use Subtitle during playback to
switch the subtitle language, this does not af-
fect the settings here.
When you select Others
When you select Others, a language code
input display is shown. Please see the follow-
ing section to input the four-digit code of the
desired language. Refer to Language code
chart for DVD on page 100.
1 Touch 0 to 9 to input the language
code.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
2 Touch .
Setting the audio language
You can set the preferred audio language.
1 Touch Audio Language on the DVD
setup menu.
An audio language menu is displayed.
2 Touch the desired language.
The audio language is set.
# If you have selected Others, refer to When you
select Others on this page.
Notes
! If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the language specified on the disc is
outputted.
Setting up the DVD player
En
50
Section
14
! You can also switch the audio language by
touching Audio during playback. (Refer to
Changing audio language during playback
(Multi-audio) on page 25.)
! Even if you use Audio during playback to
switch the audio language, this does not af-
fect the settings here.
Setting the menu language
You can set the preferred language for dis-
plays of menus recorded on a disc.
1 Touch Menu Language on the DVD
setup menu.
A menu language menu is displayed.
2 Touch the desired language.
The menu language is set.
# If you have selected Others, refer to When you
select Others on the previous page.
Note
If the selected language is not recorded on the
disc, the language specified on the disc is dis-
played.
Setting the angle icon display
You can set it up so that the angle icon ap-
pears on scenes where the angle can be
switched.
! Initially, this function is set to on.
% Touch Multi Angle on the DVD setup
menu to turn angle icon display on.
# To turn the angle icon display off, touch
Multi Angle again.
Setting the aspect ratio
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect
for the display connected to V OUT.
! When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Pan Scan. Selecting 16:9
may result in an unnatural picture.
! If you select the TV aspect, the unit’s dis-
play changes to the same setting.
% Touch TVAspect on the DVD setup
menu to select the TVaspect.
Touch TVAspect repeatedly until the desired
TV aspect appears in the display.
! 16:9 – Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
! Letter Box – The picture is the shape of a
letterbox with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
! Pan Scan – The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
Notes
! When playing discs that do not specify
Pan Scan, playback is with Letter Box even if
you select Pan Scan setting. Confirm whether
the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark.
! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV
aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-
structions.
Setting the slide show interval
Slide show is possible when JPEG files are
playing with this unit. In this setting, interval
of slide show can be set.
% Touch Slide Show on the DVD setup
menu to select the slide show interval.
Touch Slide Show repeatedly until the desired
setting appears in the display.
! 10sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of
10 seconds
! 20sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of
20 seconds
! 30sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of
30 seconds
Setting up the DVD player
En
51
Section
14
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
u
p
t
h
e
D
V
D
p
l
a
y
e
r
! Manual – JPEG images can be switched
manually
Setting the parental lock
Some DVD video discs let you use parental
lock to restrict children from viewing violent
and adult-oriented scenes. You can set the par-
ental lock to your desired level.
! When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be dis-
played. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.
Setting the code number and level
You need to have registered a code number for
playing back discs with parental lock.
1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code
number.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
3 Touch .
The code number is set, and you can now set
the level.
4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired
level.
The parental lock level is set.
! 8 – Playback of the entire disc is possible
(initial setting)
! 7 to 2 – Playback of discs for children and
non-adult-oriented discs is possible
! 1 – Playback of discs for children only is
possible
Notes
! We recommend to keep a record of your code
number in case you forget it.
! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc.
Look for the level indication written at the disc
package, included literature or on the disc it-
self. Parental lock of this unit is not possible if
a parental lock level is not recorded in the
disc.
! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac-
tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The
playback of those scenes will be skipped. For
details, refer to the instruction manual that
came with the discs.
Changing the level
You can change the set parental lock level.
1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the registered
code number.
3 Touch .
This enters the code number, and you can now
change the level.
# If you input an incorrect code number, the
icon is displayed. Touch C and input the cor-
rect code number.
# If you forget your code number, refer to If you
forget your code number on this page.
4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired
level.
The new parental lock level is set.
If you forget your code number
Please see the following section, and touch C
10 times. Refer to Changing the level on this
page. The registered code number is canceled,
letting you register a new one.
Setting the DivX subtitle file
You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not.
! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when Custom is selected if no DivX exter-
nal subtitle files exist.
% Touch DivX Subtitle on the DVD setup
menu to select the desired subtitle setting.
! Original – Display the DivX subtitles
Setting up the DVD player
En
52
Section
14
! Custom – Display the DivX external subti-
tles
Notes
! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one
line. If more than 42 characters are set, the
line breaks and the characters are displayed
on the next line.
! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one
screen. If more than 126 characters are set,
the excess characters will not be displayed.
Displaying your DivX
®
VOD
registration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this unit, you first need to register
the unit with your DivX VOD content provider.
You do this by generating a DivX VOD registra-
tion code, which you submit to your provider.
% Touch DivX VOD on the DVD setup
menu.
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
! Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD
provider.
Setting for digital output
Audio which is outputted from digital output
of this unit can be selected. Normally, set to
Stream. If this unit’s digital output is not used,
there is no need to change settings.
! Selecting Linear PCM enables you to
switch the output channel if playing the fol-
lowing type of discs. (Refer to Selecting
audio output on page 27.)
— Dual mono mode DVD video discs
— Bilingual DVD-VR discs
% Touch Digital Output on the DVD setup
menu to select the desired digital output
setting.
! Stream – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is
output as it is (initial setting)
! Linear PCM – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal
is converted to and output as a linear PCM
signal
Setting up the DVD player
En
53
Section
14
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
u
p
t
h
e
D
V
D
p
l
a
y
e
r
Adjusting initial settings
¨
1 Function display
Shows the function names.
Using the initial settings, you can customize
various system settings to achieve optimal per-
formance from this unit.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Off to turn this unit off.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Initial Menu to display the function names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Switching the auxiliary setting
Auxiliary devices connected to this unit can be
activated individually. Set each AUX source to
ON when using. For more information about
connecting or using auxiliary devices, refer to
Using the AUX source on page 63.
Switching the auxiliary 1 setting
% Touch AUX1 on the initial menu to se-
lect desired setting.
! Video – auxiliary video device connected
with 4-pole mini plug cable (e.g., CD-
V150M)
! Audio – auxiliary device connected with
stereo mini plug cable
! iPod – an iPod with video capabilities con-
nected with CD-IU200V
! Off – No auxiliary device is connected
Switching the auxiliary 2 setting
% Touch AUX2 on the initial menu to turn
auxiliary 2 setting on.
# To turn auxiliary 2 setting off, touch AUX2
again.
Setting the rear output and
subwoofer controller
This unit’s rear output (rear speaker leads out-
put and RCA rear output) can be used for full-
range speaker (Full) or subwoofer
(Subwoofer) connection. If you switch the
rear output setting to Subwoofer, you can
connect a rear speaker lead directly to a sub-
woofer without using an auxiliary amp.
Initially, the unit is set for rear full-range speak-
er connection (Full). When rear output is con-
nected to full range speakers (when Full is
selected), you can connect other full range
speakers (Rear) or a subwoofer (Subwoofer)
to the RCA rear output.
! When the multi-channel processor (DEQ-
P6600) is connected to this unit, you can-
not operate this function.
1 Touch Rear Speaker on the initial menu.
Initial Settings
En
54
Section
15
2 Touch c or d next to Rear Speaker to
switch the rear output setting.
Touch c to select full-range speaker and Full
appears in the display. Touch d to select sub-
woofer and Subwoofer appears in the dis-
play.
# When no subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Full (full-range speaker).
# When a subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Subwoofer (subwoofer).
# When the rear output setting is Subwoofer,
you cannot operate the following procedure.
3 Touch c or d next to Preout to switch
the subwoofer output or rear output.
Touching c or d will switch between
Subwoofer and Rear and that status will be
displayed.
Notes
! Even if you change this setting, there is no
output unless you turn the subwoofer output
on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page
48).
! If you change this setting, subwoofer output
in the audio menu will return to the factory
settings.
! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear
output are switched simultaneously in this
setting.
Setting the FM tuning step
Normally the FM tuning step employed by
seek tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or TA is on,
the tuning step automatically changes to 100
kHz. It may be preferable to set the tuning step
to 50 kHz when AF is on.
! The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during
manual tuning.
% Touch FM Step on the initial menu to
select the FM tuning step.
Touching FM Step will switch the FM tuning
step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz. The se-
lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis-
play.
Switching Auto PI Seek
The unit can automatically search for a differ-
ent station with the same programming, even
during preset recall.
% Touch Auto PI on the initial menu to
turn Auto PI Seek on.
# To turn Auto PI Seek off, touch Auto PI
again.
Selecting menu language
Menu language can be selected from English
or Russian.
If text information such as title name, artist
name or comment is embedded in a European
language or Russian, this unit can also display
them.
! Language can be changed in the following
menus.
— Function menus
— System menu
— DVD setup menu
— Initial menu
— On-screen display
— Multi language setting for DivX
! If the embedded language and the selected
language setting are not the same, text in-
formation may not be displayed properly.
! Some characters may not be displayed
properly.
! To complete this operation, switch the igni-
tion key off and on after you set this set-
ting.
% Touch Language on the initial menu to
select the desired language.
Touch Language until the desired setting ap-
pears in the display.
English (English)—РУССКИЙ (Russian)
Initial Settings
En
55
Section
15
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Switching the sound
muting/attenuation
Sound from this system is muted or attenu-
ated automatically when the signal from the
equipment with mute function is received.
! Sound from this system returns to normal
when the muting or attenuation is can-
celed.
% Touch TEL on the initial menu to select
the setting.
Touch TEL until the desired setting appears in
the display.
! Mute – Muting
! ATT –20dB – Attenuation (ATT –20dB has a
stronger effect than ATT –10dB)
! ATT –10dB – Attenuation
! Off – Turn the sound muting/attenuation
off
Notes
! The sound is turned off, Mute is displayed
and no audio adjustments are possible.
! The sound is attenuated, ATT is displayed and
no audio adjustments, except volume control,
are possible.
! Operation returns to normal when the phone
connection is ended.
Setting the TV signal
When this unit is connected to a TV tuner, you
need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your
country TV signal setting.
! This function is initially set to Auto so that
this unit automatically adjusts the TV signal
setting.
! About your country TV signal, consult with
your nearest Pioneer dealer.
! Only when a Pioneer TV tuner (e.g. GEX-
P5700TVP) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
% Touch TV Signal on the initial menu to
select an appropriate TV signal.
Touching TV Signal switches TV signal set-
tings in the following order:
Auto—PAL—SECAM
Entering PIN code for
Bluetooth wireless connection
To connect your cellular phone to this unit via
Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to
enter PIN code on your phone to verify the
connection. The default code is 0000, but you
can change this in this function.
! With some Bluetooth audio players, you
may be required to enter the Bluetooth
audio player PIN code in advance to set
this unit for a connection.
! You can only operate this function when
Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) is con-
nected to this unit.
1 Touch PIN Code Input on the initial
menu.
PIN code input display appears.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the PIN code of
your Bluetooth audio player.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C.
3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di-
gits), touch .
The PIN code you entered is stored in this sys-
tem.
Correcting distorted sound
You can minimize distortion that may be
caused by the equalizer curve settings.
Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis-
tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted,
try switching to Low. Normally, leave the set-
ting at High to ensure quality sound.
! Only when the multi-channel processor
(DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
Initial Settings
En
56
Section
15
% Touch Digital ATT on the initial menu to
switch the digital attenuator setting.
Touch Digital ATT repeatedly until the desired
setting appears in the display.
! High – High quality sound
! Low – Minimize distortion sound
Auto TA and EQ (auto-time
alignment and auto-
equalizing)
The auto-time alignment is automatically ad-
justed for the distance between each speaker
and the listening position.
The auto-equalizer automatically measures
the car interior acoustic characteristics, and
then creates the auto-equalizer curve based
on that information.
! Only when the multi-channel processor
(DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
Please see the following section for Auto TA
and EQ operation. Refer to Auto TA and EQ
(auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on
page 84
Resetting the audio functions
You can reset all audio functions except vo-
lume.
! Only when the multi-channel processor
(DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you
can operate this function.
1 Touch Audio Reset on the initial menu.
2 Touch Reset.
3 Touch Reset again to reset audio func-
tions.
# To cancel resetting the audio functions, touch
Cancel.
Initial Settings
En
57
Section
15
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Introduction of system
adjustments
¨
1 System menu display
Shows the system function names.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
System Menu to display the system func-
tion names.
The system function names are displayed and
operable ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the display of
each source.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Changing the wide screen
mode
You can select a desired mode for enlarging a
4:3 picture to a 16:9 one.
1 Touch Wide Mode on the system menu.
2 Touch the desired wide mode setting.
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc-
tion only, giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic-
ture) without any omissions.
Just (just)
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and
the amount of enlargement increases horizontally
to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture
without sensing any disparity even on a wide
screen.
Cinema (cinema)
The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as
Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by
an intermediate proportion between Full and
Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal for a cinema-
sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap-
tions lie outside.
Zoom (zoom)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion
both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a cine-
ma-sized picture (wide screen picture).
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no
sense of disparity since its proportions are the
same as that of the normal picture.
Notes
! Different settings can be memorized for each
video source.
! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode
that does not match its original aspect ratio, it
may appear different.
! Remember that using the wide mode feature
of this system for commercial or public view-
ing purposes may constitute an infringement
on the author’s rights protected by the Copy-
right Law.
! The video image will appear coarser when
viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode.
System settings
En
58
Section
16
Changing the picture
adjustment
You can adjust the Brightness (brightness),
Contrast (contrast), Color (color) ,Hue (hue),
Dimmer (dimmer), Temperature (tempera-
ture) and Black Level (black level) for each
source and rear view camera.
! You cannot adjust Color, Hue, Contrast
and Black Level for the audio source.
1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the sys-
tem menu.
The adjustment function names are displayed.
2 Touch any of the following touch panel
keys to select the function to be adjusted.
To switch between groups of touch panel keys,
touch NEXT or PREV.
! Brightness – Adjusts the black intensity
! Contrast – Adjusts the contrast
! Color – Adjusts the color saturation
! Hue – Adjusts the tone of color (red is em-
phasized or green is emphasized)
! Dimmer – Adjust the brightness of display
! Temperature – Adjusts the color tempera-
ture, resulting in a better white balance
! Black Level – Emphasizes dark portion on
images so that the difference between
brightness and darkness becomes more
distinct
! Rear View/Source – Switch the picture ad-
justment modes
# You cannot adjust the picture adjustment for
rear view camera when Camera Polarity is set to
Off. (Refer to Setting for rear view camera (back up
camera) on the next page.)
# If color system is set to PAL/PAL-M/SECAM,
you cannot adjust Hue.
# With some rear view cameras, picture adjust-
ment may not be possible.
3 Touch c or d to adjust the selected
item.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the level of selected item. +24 to –24
is displayed as the level is increased or de-
creased.
# Temperature can be adjusted from +3 to –3.
# Black Level can be set on or off.
Adjusting the dimmer
To prevent the display from being too bright at
night, the display is automatically dimmed
when the car’s headlights are turned on. You
can turn the dimmer on or off.
1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the sys-
tem menu.
The adjustment function names are displayed.
2 Touch NEXT.
3 Touch Dimmer.
4 Touch c or d to adjust the brightness.
Each time you touch c or d it moves cursor
towards the left or the right.
The level indicates the brightness of the
screen being adjusted. The farther the cursor
moves to the right, the brighter the screen
becomes.
Setting the AV input
You can switch the setting according to the
connected component.
! Select Video to watch video of a connected
component as AV source.
! Select EXT-Video to watch video of a con-
nected video unit as EXT source.
! Select TV to watch TV pictures from a con-
nected TV tuner as TV source.
% Touch AV Input on the system menu to
select the AV input setting.
! Off – No video component connected
! Video – External video component (such as
portable video player)
! EXT-Video – External video unit (such as
Pioneer products available in the future)
! TV – TV tuner connected with RCA cable
System settings
En
59
Section
16
S
y
s
t
e
m
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
Setting the clock
Use these instructions to set the clock.
1 Touch Clock Adjustment on the system
menu.
2 Touch On/Off to turn the clock display
on.
# To turn the clock display off, touch On/Off
again.
3 Touch c or d to select the segment of
the clock display you wish to set.
Each time you touch c or d it will select one
segment of the clock display:
Hour—Minute
As you select segments of the clock display
the segment selected will be highlighted.
4 Touch a or b to put a clock right.
Notes
! You can match the clock to a time signal by
touching Just.
— If 00 to 29, the minutes are rounded down.
(e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00.)
— If 30 to 59, the minutes are rounded up.
(e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.)
! Even when the sources are off, the clock dis-
play appears on the display.
Setting for rear view
camera (back up camera)
CAUTION
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera
which outputs mirror reversed images, other-
wise screen image may appear reversed.
This unit features a function that automatically
switches to the rear view camera video (V IN
jack) when a rear view camera is installed on
your vehicle. When the gear shift is in RE-
VERSE (R) position, the video automatically
switches to a rear view camera video. (For
more details, consult your dealer.)
! After you set up the rear view camera set-
ting, move the gear shift in REVERSE (R)
and confirm if a rear view camera video
can be shown on the display.
! If the display should be switched to a rear
view camera video by error while you are
driving forward, change the rear view cam-
era setting.
! To end watching a rear view camera video
and return to the source display, press and
hold MUTE.
! Even while driving, rear view camera image
can be displayed. To do this, touch
Rear View source icon. In this case, touch
Rear View again to turn off the rear view
camera. For details, refer to Selecting a
source on page 11.
% Touch Camera Polarity on the system
menu to select an appropriate setting.
! Battery – When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the gear shift
is in REVERSE (R) position
! Ground – When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is negative while the gear shift
is in REVERSE (R) position
! Off – When a rear view camera is not con-
nected to this unit
System settings
En
60
Section
16
Introduction of
entertainment settings
¨
1 Entertainment menu display
Shows the entertainment function names.
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Entertainment Menu to display the enter-
tainment function names.
The entertainment function names are dis-
played and operable ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the display of
each source.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Selecting the background
display
You can switch background displays while lis-
tening to each source.
1 Touch Background on the entertain-
ment menu.
2 Touch the desired setting.
You can select one from the following list.
! BGP1 – Background picture 1
! BGP2 – Background picture 2
! BGP3 – Background picture 3
! BGP4 – Background picture 4
! BGV1 – Background visual 1
! BGV2 – Background visual 2
! BGV3 – Background visual 3
! Photo – JPEG image stored in this unit
! AV Input – Video image from the external
video unit that is connected to this unit
# When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video,
AV Input cannot be selected. (Refer to page 59.)
# If no JPEG image has been stored in this unit,
you cannot select Photo. To store JPEG image in
this unit, see the following section. Refer to Cap-
ture an image in JPEG files on page 38.
Selecting the illumination
color
This unit is equipped with multiple-color illu-
mination.
Direct selection from preset
illumination color
You can select an illumination color from the
color list.
1 Touch Illumination Color on the enter-
tainment menu.
2 Touch one of the color list.
You can select one from the following list.
! Blue (blue)
! Red (red)
! Amber (amber)
! Green (green)
! White (white)
! Scan (scanning all colors)
Notes
! Scan setting cycles continuously through all
the colors.
! While scanning all colors, touching Scan can
stop the scanning. When this is done, you can
select the displayed color as the background.
Customizing the illumination color
1 Touch Illumination Color on the enter-
tainment menu.
Entertainment settings
En
61
Section
17
E
n
t
e
r
t
a
i
n
m
e
n
t
s
e
t
t
i
n
g
s
2 Touch Custom to display the customiz-
ing menu.
3 Press +/– (VOLUME) to customize the
color.
4 To store the customized color in mem-
ory, touch and hold one of preset keys
(Memo1, Memo2 or Memo3) until the beep
sounds.
The customized color has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset key,
the color is recalled from memory.
Selecting the OSD color
You can change the OSD color.
1 Touch Screen Color on the entertain-
ment menu.
2 Touch one of the color list.
You can select one from the following list.
! Blue (blue)
! Red (red)
! Amber (amber)
! Green (green)
! White (white)
Entertainment settings
En
62
Section
17
Adjusting the response
positions of the touch panels
(Touch Panel Calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad-
justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in
which you touch four corners of the screen;
and 16-point adjustment, in which you make
fine-adjustments on the entire screen.
! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad-
justment, and gently touch the screen. If
you press the touch panel forcefully, the
touch panel may be damaged. Do not use
a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen
or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen
is damaged.
! If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-
formed properly, consult your local Pioneer
dealer.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
Off to turn this unit off.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
2 Press and hold h(eject).
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap-
pears.
3 Touch each of the arrows on the four
corners of the screen with the touch panel
adjustment pen.
# To cancel the adjustment, press and hold
MUTE.
4 Press DISP OFF to complete the 4-point
adjustment.
The adjusted position data is saved.
# Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad-
justed position data.
5 Press DISP OFF to proceed to the 16-
point adjustment.
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
# To cancel the adjustment, press and hold
MUTE.
6 Gently touch the center of the + mark
displayed on the screen with the touch
panel adjustment pen.
After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po-
sition data is saved.
# Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad-
justed position data.
7 Press and hold MUTE to complete the
adjustment.
Using the AUX source
A separately sold auxiliary device such as VCR
or portable device can be connected to this
unit. When connected, auxiliary device is auto-
matically recognized as AUX source and as-
signed to AUX.
About AUX connection method
You have two methods to connect auxiliary de-
vice to this unit.
Mini pin plug cable (AUX-1)
When connecting auxiliary device using a mini
plug cable
iPod and portable audio/video player can be
connected to this unit via mini plug cable.
! If an iPod with video capabilities is con-
nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole)
cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the
video contents of the iPod.
! It is possible to connect a portable audio/
video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4
pole) to RCA cable, which is sold sepa-
rately. However, depending on the cable, re-
verse connection between red (right side
audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is re-
quired. Otherwise, audio and video may not
be correctly reproduced.
Other Functions
En
63
Section
18
O
t
h
e
r
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
% Insert the stereo mini plug into the
AUX input jack on this unit.
For more details, refer to the installation man-
ual.
IP-BUS-RCA interconnector (AUX-2)
When connecting auxiliary device using an IP-
BUS-RCA Interconnector (sold separately)
% Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such
as the CD-RB10/CD-RB20 (sold separately)
to connect this unit to auxiliary device fea-
turing RCA output.
For more details, refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Inter-
connector owner’s manual.
# You can only make this type of connection if
the auxiliary device has RCA outputs.
Selecting AUX as the source
% Touch the source icon and then touch
AUX-1/AUX-2 to select AUX as the source.
# If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX
cannot be selected. For more details, refer to
Switching the auxiliary setting on page 54.
Setting the AUX title
The title displayed for the AUX source can be
changed.
! Each title can be up to 10 characters long.
1 After you have selected AUX as the
source, touch AV Menu and Function Menu
and then touch Name Edit.
# When the touch panel keys are not displayed,
you can display them by touching the screen.
2 Touch ABC to select the desired charac-
ter type.
Touch ABC repeatedly to switch between the
following character types:
Alphabet (upper case)—Alphabet (lower case)
—European letters, such as those with ac-
cents (e.g., á, à, ä, ç)
# You can select to input numbers and symbols
by touching 123.
3 Touch a or b to select a letter of the al-
phabet.
4 Touch c or d to move the cursor.
5 Touch OK to store the entered title in
memory.
6 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
Using the external unit
External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such
as ones available in the future) that, although
incompatible as a source, enables control of
basic functions with this unit. Two external
units can be controlled with this unit. When
two external units are connected, the external
unit is automatically allocated to external unit
1 or external unit 2 by this unit.
Basic operations of the external unit are ex-
plained below. Allocated functions are differ-
ent depending on the connected external unit.
For details concerning functions, refer to exter-
nal unit’s owner’s manual.
Selecting the external unit as
the source
% Touch the source icon and then touch
EXT-1/EXT-2 to select external unit as the
source.
Basic operation
Functions allocated to the following opera-
tions are different depending on the con-
nected external unit. For details concerning
functions, refer to the connected external
unit’s owner’s manual.
% Touch Band.
Other Functions
En
64
Section
18
% Keep touching Band.
% Touch c or d.
% Keep touching c or d.
% Touch a or b.
Using the functions allocated
to 1 to 6 keys
1 Touch NEXT.
2 Touch any of 1 to 6 to select a function.
Advanced operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
! Function1 (function 1)
! Function2 (function 2)
! Function3 (function 3)
! Function4 (function 4)
! Auto/Manual (auto/manual)
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch
Back.
Other Functions
En
65
Section
18
O
t
h
e
r
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
Bluetooth Audio
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨
! If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200) to this unit, you can control Blue-
tooth audio players via Bluetooth wireless
technology.
! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold
on the market.
Important
! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con-
nected to this unit, the operations available
with this unit are limited to the following two
levels:
— A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile): Only playing back songs on your
audio player is possible.
— AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Con-
trol Profile): Playing back, pausing, select-
ing songs, etc., are possible.
! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio
players available on the market, operations
with your Bluetooth audio player using this
unit vary extensively. Refer to the instruction
manual that came with your Bluetooth audio
player as well as this manual while operating
your player on this unit.
! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed
playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can-
not be displayed on this unit.
! While you are listening to songs on your Blue-
tooth audio player, refrain from using on your
cellular phone as much as possible. If you use
your cellular phone, the signal from your cel-
lular phone may cause noise on the song play-
back.
! When you are talking on a cellular phone con-
nected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology, song playback from your Bluetooth
audio player connected to this unit is muted.
! Even if you are listening to a song on your
Bluetooth audio player and you switch to an-
other source, song playback continues.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. This
section provides brief information on Blue-
tooth audio player operations with this unit,
which slightly differs or is abbreviated from
that described in the Bluetooth adapter’s op-
eration manual.
! Even though your audio player does not
contain a Bluetooth module, you can still
control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire-
less technology. To control your audio
player using this unit, connect a product
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology
(available on the market) to your audio
player and connect the Bluetooth adapter
(e.g. CD-BTB200) to this unit.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Connection indicator
Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection
status.
3 Device name
Shows the device name of the connected
Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adap-
ter).
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
BT-Audio to select the Bluetooth audio
source.
# For this unit to control your Bluetooth audio
player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless
connection. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth
audio player on the next page.)
Available accessories
En
66
Section
19
2 Touch d.
Playback starts.
3 To skip back or forward to another
track, briefly touch oor p.
# You can also skip back or forward to another
track by pressing c or d (TRACK).
4 To perform fast forward or reverse,
keep touching oor p.
# You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward
by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).
5 To stop playback, touch g.
Pausing playback
% Touch e during playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you
turned pause on, touch d.
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Connecting a Bluetooth audio
player
% Touch Connection Open on the function
menu to turn the connection open on.
Connection Waiting is displayed. This unit is
now on standby for connection from Bluetooth
audio player.
If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for
Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to
this unit is automatically established.
Note
Before you can use audio players you may need
to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player
requires a PIN code to establish a connection,
look for the code on the player or in its accompa-
nying documentation. Refer to Entering PIN code
for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 56.
Disconnecting a Bluetooth
audio player
% Touch Disconnect on the function
menu.
After the disconnection is completed,
No Connection is displayed.
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) information
% Touch Device Information on the func-
tion menu to display the BD address.
Various information regarding the Bluetooth
wireless technology are displayed.
! Device Name (device name of this system)
! BD Address (address of Bluetooth device)
! System Version (system version)
! BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth
module)
Available accessories
En
67
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Bluetooth Telephone
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨ ··· ''' ···
· ·
! If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200), you can connect a cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to
this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even
while driving.
! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold
on the market.
Important
! Since this unit is on standby to connect with
your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless
technology, using this unit without running
the engine can result in battery drainage.
! Advanced operations that require your atten-
tion such as dialing numbers on the monitor,
using phone book, etc., are prohibited while
you are driving. When you need to use these
advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a
safe place.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 User number indicator
Shows the registration number of the cellu-
lar phone.
3 Device name
Shows the device name of the cellular
phone.
4 Automatic answering/Automatic reject-
ing indicator
Shows when the automatic answering func-
tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting
automatic answering on page 74).
Shows when the automatic rejecting func-
tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting
automatic rejecting on page 74).
5 Voice recognition indicator
Shows when the voice recognition function
is on (for more details, refer to Voice recogni-
tion on the next page).
6 Signal level indicator
Shows the signal strength of cellular phone.
! The level shown on the indicator may dif-
fer form the actual signal level.
! Depending on the cellular phones featur-
ing Bluetooth wireless technology, radio
field intensity is not available. In this
case, the signal level indicator does not
appear.
! If your cellular phone is out of service,
is displayed.
7 Telephone indicator
Shows when a phone connection using
Bluetooth wireless technology is estab-
lished (for more details, refer to Connecting
a cellular phone on page 70).
! While connecting automatically, tele-
phone indicator is flashing.
8 Battery strength indicator
Shows the battery strength of cellular
phone.
! The level shown on the indicator may dif-
fer from the actual battery strength.
! If the battery strength is not available,
nothing is displayed in the battery
strength indicator area.
9 Incoming call notice indication
Shows when an incoming call has been re-
ceived and not checked yet.
! Incoming call notice is not displayed for
calls made when your cellular phone is
disconnected from this unit.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. This
section provides brief information on the
hands-free phoning operations with this unit
which slightly differs or is cut short from that
described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation
manual.
! This unit is not compatible with registration
for guest phone.
Available accessories
En
68
Section
19
! This unit does not have the name edit func-
tion of a Phone Book entry.
% Touch the source icon and then touch
TEL to select the telephone.
Note
The equalizer curve for the phone source is fixed.
When selecting the phone source, you cannot
perform the operation in the following section.
Refer to Using the equalizer on page 47.
When the multi-channel processor is connected
to this unit, you can operate the equalizer func-
tion even when selecting the phone source. Refer
to Recalling equalizer curves on page 83.
Setting up for hands-free phoning
Before you can use the hands-free phoning
function you must set up the unit for use with
your cellular phone. This entails establishing a
Bluetooth wireless connection between this
unit and your phone, registering your phone
with this unit, and adjusting the volume level.
1 Connection
For detailed instructions on connecting your
phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology, refer to Connecting a cellular phone on
the next page.
# Your phone should now be temporarily con-
nected. However, to make best use of the technol-
ogy, we recommend you register the phone to
this unit.
2 Registration
To register your temporarily connected phone,
refer to Registering a connected cellular phone
on the next page.
3 Volume adjustment
Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular
phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume
level is recorded in this unit as the default set-
ting.
# Caller’s voice volume and ring volume may
vary depending on the type of cellular phone.
# If the difference between the ring volume and
caller’s voice volume is big, overall volume level
may become unstable.
# Before disconnecting the cellular phone from
this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to a
proper level. If the volume is muted (zero level) on
your cellular phone, the volume level of your cel-
lular phone remains muted even after the cellular
phone is disconnected.
Making a phone call
Voice recognition
1 Touch to turn the voice recognition
function on.
Voice dial icon appears on the information bar.
Voice recognition function is now ready.
# To cancel the voice recognition function,
touch again.
2 Pronounce the name of your contact.
Taking a phone call
Answering an incoming call
1 When a call comes in, touch .
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing c (TRACK).
# If private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-
formed.
2 To end the call, touch .
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRACK).
Rejecting an incoming call
% When a call comes in, touch .
The call is rejected.
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRACK).
Answering a call waiting
1 Touch to answer a call waiting.
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing c (TRACK).
2 Touch to end all calls.
# The caller you have been talking to is now on
hold. To end the call, both you and your caller
need to hang up the phone.
# While your callers hold the line, touching
switches between callers.
Available accessories
En
69
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRACK).
Rejecting call waiting
% Touch to reject a call waiting.
# You can also perform the same operation by
pressing d (TRACK).
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the telephone
standby display.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Connecting a cellular phone
Searching for available cellular phones
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Search to search for available cel-
lular phones.
While searching, Searching flashes. When
available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology are found, device name or
Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob-
tained) is displayed.
# If this unit fails to find any available cellular
phones, Not Found is displayed.
# You can display the BD address by touching
BD ADDR. To return to the device name, touch
Phone Name.
3 Touch the device name you want to
connect.
While connecting, Connecting flashes. To
complete the connection, check the device
name (Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link
code on your cellular phone.
# Up to five peripheral cellular phones are dis-
played.
# PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. You
can change this code in the initial setting. Refer
to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con-
nection on page 56.
Using a cellular phone to initiate a
connection
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Connection Open.
Connection Waiting flashes and the unit is
now on standby for connection from a cellular
phone.
3 Use cellular phone to connect to this
unit.
# To cancel this function, touch
Connection Open again.
# PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. You
can change this code in the initial setting. Refer
to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con-
nection on page 56.
Disconnecting a cellular phone
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Disconnect to disconnect the cur-
rently connected cellular phone from this
unit.
After disconnection is completed,
No Connection is displayed.
Registering a connected
cellular phone
1 Touch Phone Register on the function
menu.
Registration assignments for user phone 1, 2
and 3 appear on the display.
2 Touch and hold one of the registration
assignments to register the currently con-
nected phone.
If the registration is succeeded, the device
name of the connected phone is displayed in
the selected assignment.
Available accessories
En
70
Section
19
# If the assignment is empty, the device name is
not displayed. If the assignment is already taken,
the device name appears. To replace an assign-
ment with a new phone, first delete the current
assignment. For more detailed instructions, see
Deleting a registered phone on this page.
# If the registration failed, device name of the
connected phone is not displayed in the selected
assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and try
again.
Deleting a registered phone
1 Touch Phone Register on the function
menu.
2 Touch Delete next to the device name
you want to delete.
A confirmation display appears. Touch OK to
delete the phone.
# To cancel deleting a registered phone, touch
Cancel.
Connecting to a registered
cellular phone
Connecting to a registered phone
manually
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch Direct Connect.
3 Touch the device name you want to
connect.
While connecting, Connecting is flashing.
# If connection fails, Connection Error is dis-
played.
Connecting to a registered phone
automatically
% Touch Auto Connect on the function
menu to turn the Automatic Connection
function on.
If your cellular phone is ready for Bluetooth
wireless connection, connection to this unit is
automatically established.
# To turn automatic connection off, touch
Auto Connect again.
Using the phone book
Transferring entries to the phone book
The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en-
tries. 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50
from User 3.
1 Touch Phone Book Transfer on the func-
tion menu.
2 Touch Start to turn the Phone Book
Transfer function on.
The Phone Book Transfer is now on standby.
3 Use the cellular phone to perform
phone book transfer.
Perform phone book transfer using the cellu-
lar phone. For detailed instructions, refer to
the instruction manual that came with your
cellular phone.
# The display indicates how many entries have
been transferred and the total number to be
transferred.
# To cancel the transferring process, touch
Stop.
4 When you are done transferring Phone
Book entries, touch ESC.
Note
When the phone book transfer is complete, the
connection to your cellular phone is off. To use
the Phone Book, connect to your cellular phone
once again, referring to Connecting to a registered
cellular phone on this page.
Changing the phone book display order
% Touch Phone Book Name View on the
function menu to change the name view
order.
Inverted is displayed and the name view
order is changed.
# To change to the original order (Original),
touch Phone Book Name View again.
Calling a number in the phone book
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
Available accessories
En
71
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
1 Touch to display the Phone Book.
2 Touch c or d to select the first letter of
the name you are looking for.
3 Touch Enter to show entries starting
with the letter you chose.
The display shows the first six Phone Book en-
tries starting with that letter (e.g. “Ben”,
“Brian” and “Burt” when “B” is selected).
# To refine the search with a different letter,
touch Clear.
4 Touch a Phone Book entry you want to
call.
The display is switched to the Phone Book de-
tail display.
5 Touch phone number of the Phone
Book entry you want to call.
If several phone numbers are entered to an
entry, touch one you want to call.
The display returns to the normal display and
the Phone Book entry you selected is dis-
played on the information bar.
6 Touch to make a call.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
7 To end the call, touch .
Editing phone numbers
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
You can edit the numbers of Phone Book en-
tries. Each phone number can be up to 24 di-
gits long.
1 Touch to display the Phone Book.
2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to
edit.
Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section
for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in
the phone book on the previous page.
3 Touch Edit next to the phone number
you want to edit.
The display is changed to the Phone Book dial
edit display.
4 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
# Touch Clear to delete the number. Touch and
hold Clear to delete all the input numbers.
5 Touch OK to store the new number.
Clearing a phone book entry
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
1 Touch to display the Phone Book.
2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to
delete.
Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section
for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in
the phone book on the previous page.
3 Touch Delete to delete the Phone Book
entry.
A confirmation display appears. Touch Yes to
delete the entry.
# If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entry
that you have selected, touch No.
Using the call history
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
The 6 most recent calls made (dialed), re-
ceived and missed, are stored in the Call His-
tory. You can browse the Call History and call
numbers from it.
1 Touch Log to display the Call History.
Touching Log repeatedly switches between
the following call histories:
Missed Calls (missed call)—Dialed Calls (dia-
led call)—Received Calls (received call)
# You can switch between phone number and
name (if entered) by touching ABC/123.
# If no phone numbers have been stored in the
selected list, nothing is displayed.
Available accessories
En
72
Section
19
2 Touch a phone number or name (if en-
tered) you want to call.
The display returns to the normal display and
the phone number you selected is displayed
on the information bar.
3 Touch to make a call.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
4 To end the call, touch .
Using preset numbers
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
Assigning preset numbers
Numbers that you dial frequently can be as-
signed to presets for quick recall.
You can assign up to 6 frequently called phone
numbers to number presets.
1 Select a desired phone number from
the phone book or the call history. Or di-
rectly enter a desired phone number.
To select a desired phone number from the
Phone Book or the Call History, see the in-
structions explained in previous pages. To di-
rectly enter a desired phone number, please
see the following section. Refer to Making a
call by entering phone number on this page.
The display should now be the normal display
and the selected phone number is displayed
on the information bar.
2 Touch List to display preset assign-
ments.
Preset assignments appear in the display (if
not displayed yet).
3 Keep touching one of preset assign-
ments to store the phone number.
The phone number you selected is stored in
presets.
# No Data is displayed for empty assignment.
Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace
it to the new one by keeping touching the assign-
ment.
Recalling preset numbers
1 Touch List to display preset assign-
ments.
Preset assignments appear in the display (if
not displayed yet).
2 Touch one of preset assignments.
The selected phone number should now be
displayed on the information bar.
3 Touch to make a call.
4 To end the call, touch .
Making a call by entering
phone number
Important
Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park-
ing brake when performing this operation.
1 Touch Direct to display the direct dial
display.
2 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers.
# For an international call, touch Add “+” to
add + to the phone number.
# Touch Clear to delete the number. Touch and
hold Clear to delete all the input numbers.
# Up to 24 digits can be entered.
# If you want to store the entered phone number
to preset assignment, touch Set here. The display
returns to the normal display and the phone num-
ber you entered is selected.
3 When you completed entering the
number, touch to make a call.
4 To end the call, touch .
Clearing memory
1 Touch Clear Memory on the function
menu.
2 Touch Clear next to the item you want
to delete from the memory.
Select from the following:
! Phone Book (phone book)
! Dialed Calls (dialed call history)
! Received Calls (received call history)
! Missed Calls (missed call history)
Available accessories
En
73
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
! Dial Preset (preset phone numbers)
After selecting a desired item, a confirmation
display appears. Touch OK to delete the mem-
ory.
# If you do not want to clear memory that you
have selected, touch Cancel.
# If you want to clear all the Phone Book, dia-
led/received/missed call history list and preset
phone number, touch Clear All.
Setting automatic answering
% Touch Auto Answer on the function
menu to turn the automatic answer on.
# To turn the automatic answer off, touch
Auto Answer again.
Setting automatic rejecting
% Touch Refuse All Calls to turn the auto-
matic call rejection on.
# To turn the automatic call rejection off, touch
Refuse All Calls again.
Switching the ring tone
% Touch Ring Tone on the function menu
to turn the ring tone on.
# To turn the ring tone off, touch Ring Tone
again.
Echo canceling and noise reduction
% Touch Echo Cancel on the function
menu to turn Echo Cancel function on.
# To turn echo canceling off, touch Echo Cancel
again.
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) address
Displaying BD address of this system
% Touch Device Information on the func-
tion menu to display the BD address.
Various information regarding the Bluetooth
wireless technology are displayed.
! Device Name (device name of this system)
! BD Address (address of Bluetooth device)
! System Version (version of this unit’s mi-
croprocessor)
! BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth
module)
Displaying BD address of your
cellular phone
1 Touch Phone Connect on the function
menu.
2 Touch BD Address to display the BD ad-
dress.
12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed.
# To return to the device name, touch
Phone Name.
Available accessories
En
74
Section
19
TV tuner
Basic Operations
´´´ ¨¨¨ ···
You can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.g.
GEX-P5700TVP), which is sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
TV tuner’s operation manual. This section pro-
vides information on TV operations with this
unit, which differs from that described in the
TV tuner’s operation manual.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to.
3 Preset number indicator
Shows which preset has been selected.
4 Channel indicator
Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned.
1 Touch the source icon and then touch
TV to select the TV.
# When the source icon is not displayed, you
can display it by touching the screen.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch Band to select a band.
Touch Band repeatedly until the desired band
is displayed, TV1 or TV2.
4 To perform manual tuning, briefly
touch c or d.
# You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing c or d (TRACK).
5 To perform seek tuning, keep touching
c or d for about one second and release.
The tuner will scan the channels until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
# You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching
either c or d.
# If you keep touching c or d you can skip
broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as
soon as you release the keys.
# You can also perform seek tuning by pressing
and holding c or d (TRACK).
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
You can easily store up to 12 broadcast sta-
tions for later recall.
! Six stations for each band can be stored in
memory.
1 Touch List to display the preset list.
2 When you find a station that you want
to store in memory, keep touching one of
preset tuning keys P01 to P12 until the
beep sounds.
The selected broadcast station has been
stored in memory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key the station is recalled from memory.
# When P01 to P06 and P07 to P12 are not dis-
played, you can display them by touching List.
# You can also use a and b to recall stations
assigned to preset tuning keys P01 to P12.
Introduction to advanced
operations
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Function Menu to display the function
names.
The function names are displayed and oper-
able ones are highlighted.
2 Touch ESC to return to the TV picture.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Available accessories
En
75
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Storing the strongest broadcast
stations sequentially
% Touch BSSM on the function menu to
turn BSSM on.
BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing
the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be
stored in order from the lowest channel up.
When finished, BSSM stops flashing.
# To cancel the storage process, touch BSSM
again.
Note
Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re-
place broadcast stations you have saved using
P01 to P12.
Selecting the area group
1 Touch Country on the function menu.
2 Touch c or d to select the area group.
Touch c or d until the desired area group ap-
pears in the display.
Country 1 (CCIR channel)—Country 2 (Italy
channel)—Country 3 (U.K. channel)—
Country 4 (OIRT channel)
Digital Signal Processor
Introduction of DSP adjustments
¨
You can use this unit to control multi-channel
processor (DEQ-P6600), which is sold sepa-
rately.
1 DSP display
Shows the DSP function names.
By carrying out the following settings/adjust-
ments in the order shown, you can create a fi-
nely-tuned sound field effortlessly.
1 Setting the speaker setting
2 Using the position selector
3 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-
equalizing)
4 Adjusting the time alignment
5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a
test tone
6 Selecting a cross-over frequency
7 Adjusting the speaker output levels
8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch
DSP Menu to display the DSP function
names.
The DSP function names are displayed and
operable ones are highlighted.
# To go to the next group of function names,
touch b.
# To return to the previous group of function
names, touch a.
# When playing discs recorded with more than
96 kHz sampling frequency, you cannot use audio
functions. Also, equalizer curve setting, Position,
Auto EQ and Auto TA will be canceled.
Available accessories
En
76
Section
19
# When playing discs recorded with more than
96 kHz sampling frequency, audio is outputted
from front speakers only.
# When selecting FM as the source, you cannot
switch to Source Level Adjuster.
# When playing other than the DVD disc, you
cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control.
# When neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected
in Position, you cannot switch to
Time Alignment.
# When both the center speaker and the rear
speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you
cannot switch to Dolby Pro Logic II.
2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary dis-
play.
# To return to the previous display, touch Back.
Using the position selector
One way to assure a more natural sound is to
accurately position the stereo image, putting
you right in the center of the sound field. The
position selector function lets you automati-
cally adjust the speaker output levels and in-
serts a delay time to match the number and
position of occupied seats. When used in con-
junction with the SFC, the feature will make
the sound image more natural and offer a pa-
noramic sound that envelops you.
1 Touch Position on the DSP function
menu.
2 Touch c/d/a/b to select a listening po-
sition.
Touch one of these, c/d/a/b, to select a lis-
tening position as listed in the table.
Key Display Position
c Front-L Front seat left
d Front-R Front seat right
a Front Front seats
b All All seats
# To cancel the selected listening position,
touch the same key again.
Note
When you make adjustments to the listening po-
sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set
for appropriate levels. You can tailor the levels
more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker
output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the
speaker output levels.
Using balance adjustment
You can change the fader/balance setting so
that it can provide the ideal listening environ-
ment in all occupied seats.
1 Touch Fader/Balance on the DSP func-
tion menu.
2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Each time you touch a or b it moves the
front/rear speaker balance towards the front or
the rear.
Front:25 to Rear:25 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
# FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only
two speakers are used.
3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speak-
er balance.
Each time you touch c or d it moves the left/
right speaker balance towards the left or the
right.
Left:25 to Right:25 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to right.
Using the sound field control
The SFC function creates the sensation of a
live performance.
Available accessories
En
77
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
! The acoustics of different performance en-
vironments are not the same and depend
on the extent and contour of space through
which sound waves move and on how
sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors
and ceilings. At a live performance you
hear music in three stages: direct sound,
early reflections, and late reflections, or re-
verberations. Those factors are programed
into the SFC circuitry to recreate the acous-
tics of various performance settings.
% Touch SFC on the DSP function menu to
select the setting.
Touch SFC until the desired setting appears in
the display.
Musical—Drama—Action—Jazz—Hall—
Club—Off
Display Setting
Musical Musical
Drama Drama
Action Action
Jazz Jazz
Hall Hall
Club Club
Off Off
Note
If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2-
channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC
effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel
audio (i.e., Musical, Drama or Action), we re-
commend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the
other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are
intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., Jazz,
Hall or Club), we recommend turning Dolby Pro
Logic II off.
Adjusting source levels
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
! Settings are based on the FM volume level,
which remains unchanged.
1 Compare the FM volume level with the
level of the source you wish to adjust.
2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the DSP
function menu.
3 Touch c or d to adjust the source vo-
lume.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the source volume.
+4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Notes
! The MW/LW volume level can also be adjusted
with source level adjustments.
! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX
are set to the same source level adjustment
volume automatically.
! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to
the same source level adjustment volume
automatically.
! AUX (auxiliary input) and AV (AV input) are set
to the same source level adjustment volume
automatically.
Using the dynamic range control
The dynamic range refers to the difference be-
tween the largest and softest sounds. The dy-
namic range control compresses this
difference so that you can clearly hear sounds
even at low volume levels.
! The dynamic range control is effective only
on Dolby Digital sounds.
! When playing other than the DVD disc, you
cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control.
Available accessories
En
78
Section
19
1 Touch Dynamic Range Control on the
DSP function menu.
2 Touch d to turn the dynamic range con-
trol on.
# To turn dynamic range control off, touch c.
Using the down-mix function
The down-mix function allows you to play back
multi-channel audio in 2 channels.
1 Touch Down Mix on the DSP function
menu.
2 Touch c or d to select the desired level.
! Lo/Ro – Stereo mix the original audio that
do not contain channel modes such as sur-
round components.
! Lt/Rt – Down mix so that the surround
components can be restored (decoded).
Using the direct control
You can override audio settings to check for ef-
fectiveness of your audio settings.
! All audio functions are locked out when the
direct control is on except VOLUME and
Dolby Pro Logic II.
1 Touch Digital Direct on the DSP func-
tion menu.
2 Touch d to turn the direct control on.
# To turn direct control off, touch c.
Using the Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth
output channels from two-channel sources to
achieve high-purity matrix surround.
! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48 kHz
sampling rate stereo source and has no ef-
fect on other types of source.
! When both the center speaker and the rear
speaker are set to OFF in the speaker set-
ting, you cannot switch to
Dolby Pro Logic II.
1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II.
2 Touch any of the following touch panel
keys to select the desired mode.
! Movie – The Movie mode suitable for movie
playback
! Music – The Music mode suitable for music
playback
! Matrix – The Matrix mode for when FM
radio reception is weak
! OFF – Turn Dolby Pro Logic II off
! Music Adjust – Adjust the Music mode
# You can operate Music Adjust only when
Music has been selected.
Adjusting the Music mode
You can adjust the Music mode with the fol-
lowing three controls.
! Panorama (Panorama) extends the front
stereo image to include the surround
speakers for an exciting “wraparound” ef-
fect.
! Dimension (Dimension) allows you to gra-
dually adjust the sound field either towards
the front or the rear.
! Center Width Control (Center Width) al-
lows center-channel sounds to be posi-
tioned between the center speaker and the
left/right speakers. It improves the left-cen-
ter-right stage presentation for both the dri-
ver and the front passenger.
1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II.
2 Touch Music and then touch
Music Adjust.
# You can operate Music Adjust only when
Music has been selected.
3 Touch a or b to select Panorama (pa-
norama).
Each time you touch a or b selects the item
in the following order:
Panorama (panorama)—Dimension (dimen-
sion)—Center Width (center width)
Available accessories
En
79
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
4 Touch d to turn the panorama control
on.
# To turn the panorama control off, touch c.
5 Touch b to select Dimension and then
touch c or d to adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
Each time you touch c or d it moves the
sound towards the front or the rear.
+3 to -3 is displayed as the front/rear speaker
balance moves from front to rear.
6 Touch b to select Center Width and
then touch c or d to adjust the center
image.
Each time you touch c or d it gradually
spreads the center channel sound into the
front left and right speakers over a range 0 to
7.
3 is the default and it’s recommended for
most recordings. 0 places all center sound in
the center speaker. 7 places all center sound
equally in the left/right speakers.
Setting the speaker setting
You need to make with/without (or yes/no) and
size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad-
justments depending on the installed speak-
ers. The size needs to be set to Large (large) if
the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds
of about 100 Hz or below. Otherwise select
Small (small).
! Low frequency range is not output if the
subwoofer is set to Off and the front and
rear speakers set to Small or Off.
! It is imperative that non-installed speakers
be set to Off.
! Set the front or rear speaker to Large if the
speaker is capable of reproducing bass
content, or if no subwoofer is installed.
1 Touch Speaker Setting.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front (front speakers)—Center (center speak-
er)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (sub-
woofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting)
# You can switch to Phase only when the sub-
woofer has been set to On.
3 Touch c or d to select the correct size
for the selected speaker.
Each time you touch c or d selects the size in
the following order:
Off (off)—Small (small)—Large (large)
# You cannot select Off, when Front (front
speakers) have been selected.
# You can select On or Off, when Subwoofer
(subwoofer) has been selected.
# You can switch Reverse (reverse phase) or
Normal (normal phase), when Phase (subwoofer
setting) has been selected.
Correcting the subwoofer’s phase
If trying to boost the bass output of the sub-
woofer doesn’t do much or rather makes you
feel that the bass gets more murky, this may
indicate that the subwoofer’s output and bass
content you hear over other speakers cancel
each other out. To remove this problem, try
changing the phase setting for the subwoofer.
1 Touch Speaker Setting.
2 Touch a or b to select Subwoofer (sub-
woofer).
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front (front speakers)—Center (center speak-
er)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (sub-
woofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting)
3 Touch d to turn subwoofer output on.
# To turn subwoofer output off, touch c.
4 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the phase of subwoofer output.
Touch d to select normal phase and Normal
appears in the display. Touch c to select re-
verse phase and Reverse appears in the dis-
play.
Available accessories
En
80
Section
19
Note
When playing a 2-channel mono source with
Dolby Pro Logic II turned on, there may be occa-
sions when the following will occur:
! No audio is outputted if the center speaker
setting is Small or Large and no center speak-
er is installed.
! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if
installed and the center speaker setting is
Small or Large.
Adjusting the speaker output
levels
Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listen-
ing to an audio output. First, use test tone to
adjust the approximate speaker level, and then
use this function to adjust finely.
1 Touch Speaker Level.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center
speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)—
Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear
speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)
# You cannot select speakers whose size is set
to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on the
previous page.)
3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker out-
put level.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the equalizer level. +10 to –10 is dis-
played as the level is increased or decreased.
Note
To adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is
the same as making the speaker output levels at
Test Tone. Both provide the same results.
Selecting a cross-over frequency
You can select a frequency, under which
sounds are reproduced through the subwoo-
fer. If the installed speakers include one whose
size has been set to Small, you can select a
frequency, under which sounds are repro-
duced through a Large speaker or subwoofer.
1 Touch Cross Over.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front (front speakers)—Center (center speak-
er)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (sub-
woofer)
3 Touch c or d to select cross-over fre-
quency.
Each time you touch c or d selects cross-over
frequencies in the following order:
63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz—160Hz—
200Hz
Note
Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross-
over frequency of the subwoofer’s L.P.F. (low-pass
filter) and that of the Small speaker H.P.F. (high-
pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has
no effect if the subwoofer is set to Off and other
speakers are set to Large or Off.
Adjusting the speaker output
levels using a test tone
This function allows you to easily get the over-
all balance right among the speakers.
1 Touch Test Tone.
Available accessories
En
81
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
2 Touch Start to start the test tone out-
put.
The test tone is outputted. It rotates from
speaker to speaker in the following sequence
at intervals of about two seconds. The current
settings for the speaker over which you hear
the test tone are shown in the display.
Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center
speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)—
Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear
speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)
Check each speaker output level. If no adjust-
ments are needed, perform step 4 to stop the
test tone.
# The settings do not appear for speakers
whose size is set to Off. (Refer to Setting the
speaker setting on page 80.)
3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker out-
put level.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the equalizer level. +10 to –10 is dis-
played as the level is increased or decreased.
# The test tone rotates to the next speaker after
about two seconds from the last operation.
4 Touch Stop to stop the test tone out-
put.
Notes
! If needed, select speakers and adjust their ‘ab-
solute’ output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the
speaker output levels on the previous page.)
! To adjust the speaker output levels in this
mode is the same as making the speaker out-
put levels at Speaker Level (speaker output
level). Both provide the same results.
Using the time alignment
The time alignment lets you adjust the dis-
tance between each speaker and the listening
position.
1 Touch Time Alignment.
2 Touch any of the following touch panel
keys to select the time alignment.
! Initial – Initial time alignment (factory set-
ting)
! Auto TA – Time alignment created by auto
TA and EQ. (Refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-
time alignment and auto-equalizing) on
page 84.)
! Custom – Adjusted time alignment that
you can create for yourself
! Off – Turn the time alignment off
! TA Adjust – Adjust the time alignment as
desired
# You cannot select Auto TA if auto TA and EQ
has not been carried out.
# You cannot select TA Adjust when neither
Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position.
Adjusting the time alignment
You can adjust the distance between each
speaker and the selected position.
! An adjusted time alignment is memorized
in Custom.
1 Touch Time Alignment and then touch
TA Adjust.
# You cannot select TA Adjust when neither
Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position.
2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to
be adjusted.
Each time you touch a or b selects the speak-
er in the following order:
Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center
speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)—
Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear
speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)
# You cannot select speakers whose size is set
to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on
page 80.)
Available accessories
En
82
Section
19
3 Touch c or d to adjust the distance be-
tween the selected speaker and the listen-
ing position.
Each time you touch c or d increases or de-
creases the distance. 0.0cm to 500.0cm is dis-
played as the distance is increased or
decreased.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization
to match the car’s interior acoustic character-
istics as desired.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are seven stored equalizer curves which
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list
of the equalizer curves.
Display Equalizer curve
Powerful Powerful
Natural Natural
Vocal Vocal
Flat Flat
Custom1 Custom 1
Custom2 Custom 2
Super Bass Super bass
! Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equal-
izer curves.
! When Flat is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
Flat and a set equalizer curve.
1 Touch Parametric EQ.
2 Touch a or b to select the desired item.
Each time you touch a or b selects the item
in the following order:
Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)—
Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency)
—Level (equalizer level)—Q. Factor (Q factor)
3 Touch d to select the equalizer.
Touch d repeatedly to switch between the fol-
lowing equalizers:
Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1
—Custom2—Super Bass
Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer
For Custom1 and Custom2 equalizer curves,
you can adjust the front, rear and center
equalizer curves separately by selecting a cen-
ter frequency, an equalizer level and a Q factor
for each band.
! A separate Custom1 curve can be created
for each source.
! A Custom2 curve can be created common
to all sources.
! The center speaker largely determines the
sound image and getting the balance right
isn’t easy. We recommend reproducing a 2-
ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting
the balance right among the speakers ex-
cept for the center, and then reproducing a
5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad-
justing the center speaker output to the
balance you have already got among the
other speakers.
1 Touch Parametric EQ.
2 Touch a or b to select the desired item.
Each time you touch a or b selects the item
in the following order:
Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)—
Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency)
—Level (equalizer level)—Q. Factor (Q factor)
3 Touch d to select the equalizer.
Touch d repeatedly to switch between the fol-
lowing equalizers:
Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1
—Custom2—Super Bass
4 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the speaker to be adjusted.
Touch c or d until the desired speaker ap-
pears in the display.
Available accessories
En
83
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
Rear (rear speakers)—Center (center speaker)
—Front (front speakers)
# You cannot select speakers whose size is set
to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on
page 80.)
5 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the equalizer band to be adjusted.
Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer
bands in the following order:
Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high)
6 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the center frequency of selected band.
Touch c or d until the desired frequency ap-
pears in the display.
40Hz—50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz
—160Hz—200Hz—250Hz—315Hz—400Hz
—500Hz—630Hz—800Hz—1kHz—1.25kHz
—1.6kHz—2kHz—2.5kHz—3.15kHz—4kHz
—5kHz—6.3kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12.5kHz
7 Touch b and then touch c or d to ad-
just the equalizer level.
Each time you touch c or d it increases or de-
creases the equalizer level. +12 to –12 is dis-
played as the level is increased or decreased.
8 Touch b and then touch c or d to se-
lect the desired Q factor.
Each time you touch c or d switches between
the following Q factor:
Narrow (narrow)—Wide (wide)
# You can adjust parameters for each band of
the other speakers in the same way.
Note
You can select a center frequency for each band.
You can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc-
tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that
have intervals shorter than 1 octave among the
center frequencies of the three bands.
Using the auto-equalizer
The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve cre-
ated by auto TA and EQ (refer to Auto TA and
EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing)
on this page).
You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off.
1 Touch Auto EQ.
# You cannot use this function if auto TA and
EQ has not been carried out.
2 Touch d to turn the auto-equalizer on.
# To turn auto-equalizer off, touch c.
Auto TA and EQ (auto-time
alignment and auto-equalizing)
The auto-time alignment is automatically ad-
justed for the distance between each speaker
and the listening position.
The auto-equalizer automatically measures
the car interior acoustic characteristics, and
then creates the auto-equalizer curve based
on that information.
WARNING
To prevent accidents, never carry out auto TA and
EQ while driving. When this function measures
the car interior acoustic characteristics to create
an auto-equalizer curve, a loud measurement
tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers.
CAUTION
! Carrying out auto TA and EQ under the follow-
ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be
sure to check the conditions thoroughly be-
fore carrying out auto TA and EQ.
— When speakers are incorrectly connected.
(e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to
a subwoofer output.)
— When a speaker is connected to a power
amp delivering output higher than the
speaker’s maximum input power capabil-
ity.
Available accessories
En
84
Section
19
! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable
position the measurement tone may become
loud and measurement may take a long time,
resulting in a drain on battery power. Be sure
to place the microphone in the specified loca-
tion.
Before operating the auto TA and EQ
function
! Carry out auto TA and EQ in as quiet a
place as possible, with the car engine and
air conditioning switched off. Also cut
power to car phones or portable telephones
in the car, or remove them from the car be-
fore carrying out auto TA and EQ. Sounds
other than the measurement tone (sur-
rounding sounds, engine sound, tele-
phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct
measurement of the car interior acoustic
characteristics.
! Be sure to carry out auto TA and EQ using
the supplied microphone. Using another
microphone may prevent measurement, or
result in incorrect measurement of the car
interior acoustic characteristics.
! When front speaker is not connected, auto
TA and EQ cannot be carried out.
! When this unit is connected to a power
amp with input level control, auto TA and
EQ may not be possible if you lower power
amp input level. Set the power amp’s input
level to the standard position.
! When this unit is connected to a power
amp with an LPF, turn off the LPF on the
power amp before carrying out auto TA and
EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for
built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should
be set to the highest frequency.
! The time alignment value calculated by
auto TA and EQ may differ from the actual
distance in the following circumstances.
However, the distance has been calculated
by computer to be the optimum delay to
give accurate results for the circum-
stances, so please continue to use this
value.
— When the reflected sound within a vehi-
cle is strong and delays occur.
— When delays occur for low sounds due
to the influence of the LPF on active
subwoofers or external amps.
! Auto TA and EQ changes the audio settings
as below:
— The fader/balance settings return to the
center position. (Refer to page 77.)
— The equalizer curve switches to Flat.
(Refer to page 83.)
— It will be adjusted automatically to high
pass filter setting for front, center and
rear speaker.
! If you carry out auto TA and EQ when a pre-
vious setting of this already exists, the set-
ting will be replaced.
Carrying out auto TA and EQ
1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet
as possible, close all doors, windows and
the sun roof, and then turn the engine off.
If the engine is left running, engine noise may
prevent correct auto TA and EQ.
2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen-
ter of the headrest of the driver’s seat, fa-
cing forward, using the belt (sold
separately).
The auto TA and EQ may differ depending on
where you place the microphone. If desired,
place the microphone on the front passenger
seat to carry out auto TA and EQ.
Available accessories
En
85
Section
19
A
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
a
c
c
e
s
s
o
r
i
e
s
3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC.
If the car’s air conditioner or heater is turned
on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the air
conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto
TA and EQ.
# Press SRC/OFF to turn the source on if this
unit is turned off.
4 Select the position for the seat on
which the microphone is placed.
Refer to Using the position selector on page
77.
# If no position is selected before you start auto
TA and EQ, Front-L is selected automatically.
5 Touch the source icon and then touch
Off to turn this unit off.
6 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
7 Touch AV Menu and then touch
Initial Menu to display the function names.
8 Touch Auto EQ&TA to enter the auto TA
and EQ measurement mode.
9 Plug the microphone into the micro-
phone input jack on the multi-channel pro-
cessor.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
multi-channel processor’s operation manual.
10 Touch Start to start the auto TA and EQ.
11 Get out of the car and close the door
within 10 seconds when the 10-second
count-down starts.
The measurement tone (noise) is outputted
from the speakers, and auto TA and EQ be-
gins.
# When all speakers are connected, auto TA
and EQ is completed in about nine minutes.
# To stop auto TA and EQ, touch Stop.
# To cancel auto TA and EQ on the way, touch
Back or ESC.
12 When auto TA and EQ is completed,
Complete is displayed.
When correct measurement of car interior
acoustic characteristics is not possible, an
error message is displayed. (Refer to Under-
standing auto TA and EQ error messages on
page 91.)
13 Touch ESC to cancel the auto TA and EQ
mode.
14 Store the microphone carefully in the
glove compartment.
Store the microphone carefully in the glove
compartment or any other safe place. If the
microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for
an extended period, high temperatures may
cause distortion, color change or mal-
function.
Available accessories
En
86
Section
19
Troubleshooting
Common
Symptom Cause Action (See)
Power doesn’t turn on.
The unit doesn’t operate.
Leads and connectors are incor-
rectly connected.
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a fuse
with the same rating.
Noise and other factors are causing
the built-in microprocessor to oper-
ate incorrectly.
Press RESET. (Page 9)
Operation with the remote con-
trol isn’t possible.
The unit does not operate cor-
rectly even when the appropriate
remote control buttons are
pressed.
The remote control operation mode
is incorrect.
Switch to the correct remote control mode.
The remote control code is incor-
rect.
Make sure the remote control selection
switch setting and code type setting are the
same.
Battery power is low. Load new battery.
Some operations are prohibited
with certain discs.
Check by using another disc.
Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (Page 93)
The loaded disc is a type this unit
cannot play.
Check what type the disc is.
Non compatible video system disc
is loaded.
Change to a disc compatible to your video
system.
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.
The unit is performing still, slow mo-
tion or frame-by-frame playback.
There is no sound during still, slow motion or
frame-by-frame playback.
There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the
parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the
parking brake.
The icon is displayed, and op-
eration is not possible.
The operation is prohibited for the
disc.
This operation is not possible.
The operation is not compatible
with the disc’s organization.
This operation is not possible.
The picture stops (pauses) and
the unit cannot be operated.
Reading of data has become impos-
sible during playback.
After stopping playback once, start playback
once more.
There is no sound.
Volume level is low.
The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.
The attenuator is on. Turn the attenuator off.
There is audio and video skip-
ping.
The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly.
The picture is stretched, the as-
pect is incorrect.
The aspect setting is incorrect for
the display.
Select the appropriate setting for your display.
(Page 51)
When the ignition switch is
turned ON (or turned to ACC),
the motor sounds.
The unit is confirming whether a
disc is loaded or not.
This is a normal operation.
Additional Information
En
87
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Nothing is displayed.
The touch panel keys cannot be
used.
The rear view camera is not con-
nected.
Camera Polarity is at incorrect set-
ting.
Connect a rear view camera.
Press and hold MUTE to return to the source
display and then select the correct setting for
Camera Polarity. (Page 60)
Problems during DVD playback
Symptom Cause Action (See)
Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re-
gion number from this unit.
Replace the disc with one featuring the same
region number as this unit. (Page 7, Page
105)
A parental lock message is dis-
played and playback is not pos-
sible.
Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.
(Page 52)
Parental lock cannot be can-
celed.
The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 52)
You have forgotten your code num-
ber.
Touch C 10 times to cancel the code number.
(Page 52)
Dialog language (and subtitle
language) cannot be switched.
The DVD playing does not feature
multiple language recordings.
You cannot switch among multiple languages
if they are not recorded on the disc.
You can only switch between items
indicated in the disc menu.
Switch using the disc menu.
No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature
subtitles.
Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re-
corded on the disc.
You can only switch between items
indicated in the disc menu.
Switch using the disc menu.
Playback is not with the audio
language and subtitle language
settings selected in Setup.
The DVD playing does not feature
dialog or subtitles in the language
selected in Setup.
Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in Setup is not
recorded on the disc.
Switching the viewing angle is
not possible.
The DVD playing does not feature
scenes shot from multiple angles.
You cannot switch between multiple angles if
the DVD does not feature scenes recorded
from multiple angles.
You are trying to switch to multiple
angle viewing of a scene that is not
recorded from multiple angles.
Switch between multiple angles when watch-
ing scenes recorded from multiple angles.
The picture is extremely unclear/
distorted and dark during play-
back.
The disc features a signal to prohibit
copying. (Some discs may have
this.)
Since this unit is compatible with the copy
guard analog copy protect system, when play-
ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy-
ing, the picture may suffer from horizontal
stripes or other imperfections when viewed
on some displays. This does not mean this
unit is malfunctioning.
Problems during Video CD playback
Symptom Cause Action
The PBC (playback control)
menu display cannot be called
up.
The Video CD playing does not fea-
ture PBC.
This operation is not possible with Video CDs
not featuring PBC.
Repeat play and track/time
search are not possible.
The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs
featuring PBC.
Additional Information
En
88
Appendix
Problems during iPod playback
Symptom Cause Action
iPod doesn’t operate correctly. Cables are incorrectly connected. Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
Reset the iPod.
The iPod version is old. Update the iPod version.
Problems during multi-channel processor connection
Symptom Cause Action (See)
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
Optical cables are not connected
correctly.
Connect the cables correctly.
Even if multi-channel audio is
selected, 2-channel audio is out-
put.
Digital output setting is set to Line-
ar PCM.
Normally, set the digital output setting to
Stream. (Page 53)
Error messages
When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center, be sure to have the error
message recorded.
Built-in DVD player
Message Cause Action
Different Region Disc The disc does not have the same re-
gion number as this unit
Replace the DVD video with one bearing the
correct region number.
Error-02-XX/FF-FF Dirty disc Clean disc.
Scratched disc Replace disc.
The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Electrical or mechanical Press RESET.
Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played
by this unit
Replace the disc with one this unit can play.
The inserted disc does not contain
any files that can be played back
Replace disc.
Protect All the files on the inserted disc are
secured by DRM
Replace disc.
Skipped The inserted disc contains WMA
files that are protected by DRM
Replace disc.
Temp The temperature of this unit is out-
side the normal operating range
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to
within normal operating limits.
Rental Expired. The inserted disc that contains ex-
pired DivX VOD content.
Replace disc.
File Not-Playable - High Defi-
nition
The inserted disc contains high defi-
nition DivX file.
This unit cannot play DivX HD file. Replace
the disc with one this unit can play.
Additional Information
En
89
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
It is not possible to write it in
the flash.
This unit’s flash memory used for
temporary storage area is full.
Select the playable file.
Authorization Error This unit’s DivX registration code
has not been authorized by DivX
VOD contents provider.
Register this unit to DivX VOD contents provi-
der. (Page 53)
Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played by
this unit.
Select the playable file.
USB audio player/USB memory
Message Cause Action
Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played by
this unit.
Select the playable file.
No songs Transfer the audio files to the USB portable
audio player/USB memory and connect.
USB memory with security enabled
is connected
Follow the USB memory instructions to dis-
able the security.
Skipped The connected USB portable audio
player/USB memory contains WMA
files that are protected by Windows
Media™DRM 9/10
Play an audio file not protected by Windows
Media DRM 9/10.
Protect All the files on the connected USB
portable audio player/USB memory
are protected by Windows Media
DRM 9/10
Transfer audio files not protected by Windows
Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio
player/USB memory and connect.
N/A USB The USB device connected to is not
supported by this unit.
Connect a USB portable audio player or USB
memory that is USB Mass Storage Class
compliant.
USB device is not formatted with
FAT16 or FAT32
USB device should be formatted with FAT16
or FAT32.
Check USB The USB connector or USB cable is
short-circuited.
Confirm that the USB connector or USB
cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
The connected USB portable audio
player/USB memory consumes
more than 500 mA (maximum allow-
able current).
Disconnect the USB portable audio player/
USB memory and do not use it. Turn the igni-
tion switch to OFF, then to ACC or ON and
then connect the compliant USB portable
audio player/USB memory.
Error-02-9X/-DX Communication failure Perform one of the following operations.
–Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON.
–Disconnect the USB portable audio player/
USB memory.
–Change to a different source.
Then, return to the USB portable audio
player/USB memory.
Additional Information
En
90
Appendix
iPod
Message Cause Action
Error-02-6X/-9X/-DX Communication failure Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
Reset the iPod.
iPod failure Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
Reset the iPod.
Error-02-67 Old version of iPod Update the iPod version.
No Songs No songs Transfer the songs to iPod.
Stop No songs in the current list Select a list that contains the songs.
Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages
When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto
TA and EQ, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears, refer to the
table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. After
checking, try again.
Message Cause Action
Error. Please check MIC. Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into
the jack.
Error. Please check Front
speaker., Error. Please check
Front-L speaker., Error. Please
check Front-R speaker., Error.
Please check Center speaker.,
Error. Please check Rear
speaker., Error. Please check
Rear-L speaker., Error. Please
check Rear-R speaker., Error.
Please check Subwoofer.
The microphone cannot pick up the
measuring tone of a speaker.
! Confirm that the speakers are connected
correctly.
! Correct the input level setting of the power
amp connected to the speakers.
! Set the microphone correctly.
Error. Please check noise. The surrounding noise level is too
high.
! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as
possible, and switch off the engine, air condi-
tioner or heater.
! Set the microphone correctly.
Additional Information
En
91
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Understanding messages
Messages Translation
CAUTION: Screen image may appear re-
versed.
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror
reversed images, otherwise screen image may appear re-
versed.
Additional Information
En
92
Appendix
Handling guideline of discs
and player
! Use only discs featuring any of following
logos.
DVD video
Video CD
CD
! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert
irregular, non-round, shaped discs they
may jam in the DVD player or not play prop-
erly.
! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or
warping before playing. Discs that have
cracks, scratches or are warped may not
play properly. Do not use such discs.
! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed)
surface when handling the disc.
! Store discs in their cases when not in use.
! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do
not expose the discs to high temperatures.
! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-
micals to the surface of the discs.
! To clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft
cloth outward from the center.
! If the heater is used in cold weather, con-
densation may form on components inside
the DVD player. Condensation may cause
the DVD player to not operate properly. If
you think that condensation is a problem
turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to
allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs
with a soft cloth to remove the moisture.
! Road shocks may interrupt disc
playback.
DVD discs
! With some DVD video discs, it may not be
possible to use certain functions.
! It may not be possible to play back some
DVD video discs.
! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/
DVD-RAM discs.
Additional Information
En
93
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
DVD-R/DVD-RW discs
! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have
been recorded with the Video format (video
mode) cannot be played back.
! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/
DVD-RW discs, because of disc character-
istics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the application settings and the environ-
ment. Please record with the correct for-
mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)
! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been re-
corded with the Video Recording format
(VR mode) can be played back. However,
unfinalized disc may not be played back.
Unplayable disc should be finalized. In ad-
dition, finalized DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) disc
cannot be recorded/edited.
! DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have
been recorded with the Video Recording
format (VR mode) can be played back.
However, this unit is not compatible with
Layer Jump recording mode.
! For more information about recording
mode, please contact manufacture of DVD
recorder or application.
! The following logo indicates that this unit is
compatible with DVD-RW discs which have
been recorded with the Video Recording
format (VR mode).
AVCHD recorded discs
! This unit is not compatible with discs re-
corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec
High Definition) format. Do not insert
AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not
be ejected.
CD-R/CD-RW discs
! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-
back is possible only for discs which have
been finalized.
! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-
corder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the
lens of this unit.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the application settings and the environ-
ment. Please record with the correct for-
mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer
of the application.)
! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may be-
come impossible in case of direct exposure
to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto-
rage conditions in the vehicle.
! Titles and other text information recorded
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-
played by this unit (in the case of audio
data (CD-DA)).
! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW
discs before using them.
Dual Discs
! Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
! Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this unit. However, since the CD side of
Dual Discs is not physically compatible
with the general CD standard, it may not be
possible to play the CD side with this unit.
! Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual
Disc may result in scratches on the disc.
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual
Disc may become stuck in the disc loading
slot and will not eject. To prevent this, we
recommend you refrain from using Dual
Disc with this unit.
! Please refer to the information from the
disc manufacturer for more detailed infor-
mation about Dual Discs.
Additional Information
En
94
Appendix
Compressed audio
compatibility
WMA
! Compatible format: WMA encoded by
Windows Media Player
! File extension: .wma
! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Loss-
less, Voice: No
MP3
! File extension: .mp3
! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32,
44.1, 48 kHz for emphasis)
! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3
(ID3 tag Version 2.x is given priority than
Version 1.x.)
! M3u playlist: No
! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No
AAC
! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iTunes
! File extension: .m4a
! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
! Transmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps
! Apple Lossless: No
Handling guideline and
supplemental information
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
! Only 32 characters from beginning can be
displayed as a file name (including the file
extension) or a folder name.
! The text information of some audio files
may not be correctly displayed.
! This unit may not operate correctly depend-
ing on the application used to encode
WMA files.
! Russian text to be displayed on this unit
should be encoded with the following char-
acter sets:
— Unicode (UTF-8, UTF-16)
— Character sets other than Unicode that
are used in Windows environment and
are set to Russian in the multi-language
setting
Compressed audio files on the disc
! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Romeo
and Joliet file systems are both compatible
with this player.
! Multi-session playback is possible.
! Compressed audio files are not compatible
with packet write data transfer.
! Regardless of the length of blank section
between the songs of original recording,
compressed audio discs play with a short
pause between songs.
USB audio player/USB memory
CAUTION
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on
the USB memory/USB portable audio player even
if that data is lost while using this unit.
! This unit can play back files in the USB por-
table audio player/USB memory that is
USB Mass Storage Class. However, copy-
right protected files that are stored in
above-mentioned USB devices cannot be
played back.
! You cannot connect a USB portable audio
player/USB memory to this unit via a USB
hub.
! Partitioned USB memory is not compatible
with this unit.
! Depending on the kind of USB portable
audio player/USB memory you use, this
unit may not recognize the USB audio
player/USB memory or audio files may not
be played back properly.
! Do not leave the USB portable audio
player/USB memory in direct sunlight for
extended amounts of time. Extended expo-
sure to direct sunlight can result in USB
portable audio player/USB memory mal-
function due to the resulting high tempera-
ture.
Additional Information
En
95
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
! Do not leave the USB portable audio
player/USB memory in high temperature.
! Firmly secure the USB portable audio
player/USB memory when driving. Do not
let the USB portable audio player/USB
memory fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or accelera-
tor pedal.
! Depending on the USB devices connected
to this unit, it may generate noise in the
radio.
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files on a USB portable
audio player/USB memory with numerous
folder hierarchies.
! Do not connect anything other than the
USB portable audio player/USB memory.
! Operations may vary depending on the
kind of USB audio player and a USB mem-
ory.
Example of a hierarchy
: Folder
: Compressed audio file
¨
´

·
'
·
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
The sequence of audio files on
the disc
! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
! Folder selection sequence or other opera-
tion may be altered depending on the en-
coding or writing software.
! Up to 3 500 files on a DVD (-R/-RW) can be
played back.
! Up to 999 files on a CD (-R/-RW) can be
played back.
! Up to 700 folders on a disc can be played
back.
The sequence of audio files on
USB memory
For USB portable audio players, the sequence is
different from that of USB memory and de-
pends on the player.
! 01 to 05 represent assigned folder num-
bers. 1to 6represent the playback se-
quence. The user cannot assign folder
numbers and specify the playback se-
quence with this unit.
! Playback sequence of the audio file is the
same as recorded sequence in the USB de-
vice.
! To specify the playback sequence, the fol-
lowing method is recommended.
1 Create the file name including numbers
that specify the playback sequence (e.g.,
001xxx.mp3 and 099yyy.mp3).
2 Put those files into a folder.
3 Record the folder containing files into the
USB device.
However, depending on the system environ-
ment, you cannot specify the file playback
sequence.
! Up to 65 535 files on a USB portable audio
player/USB memory can be played back.
! Up to 6 000 folders on a USB portable
audio player/USB memory can be played
back.
iPod compatibility
! This unit supports only the following iPods.
Supported iPod software versions are
shown below. Older versions of iPod soft-
ware may not be supported.
— iPod nano first generation (software ver-
sion 1.3.1)
— iPod nano second generation (software
version 1.1.3)
Additional Information
En
96
Appendix
— iPod nano third generation (software
version 1.1.2)
— iPod fifth generation (software version
1.3.0)
— iPod classic (software version 1.1.2)
— iPod touch (software version 2.0)
— iPhone 3G (software version 2.0)
— iPhone (software version 2.0)
! Depending on the generation or version of
the iPod, some functions can not be oper-
ated.
! Operations may vary depending on the soft-
ware version of iPod.
! When using an iPod, iPod Dock Connector
to USB Cable is required.
! Pioneer CD-IU50 interface cable is also
available. For details, consult your deal-
er.
About handling the iPod
CAUTION
! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost
on the iPod even if that data is lost while
using this unit.
! Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-
tion due to the resulting high temperature.
! Do not leave the iPod in a high temperature.
! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or accelerator
pedal.
For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.
About iPod settings
! When an iPod is connected, this unit
changes the EQ (equalizer) setting of the
iPod to Flat in order to optimize the acous-
tics. When you disconnect the iPod, the EQ
returns to the original setting.
! You cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod
when using this unit. Even if you set Repeat
to off on the iPod, Repeat is automatically
changed to All when connecting the iPod
to this unit.
JPEG picture files
! JPEG is short for Joint Photographic Ex-
perts Group and refers to a still image com-
pression technology standard.
! Files are compatible with Baseline JPEG
and EXIF 2.1 still image up to resolution of
8 192 × 7 680. (EXIF format is used most
commonly with digital still cameras.)
! EXIF format that processed by the personal
computer may not be played back.
! There is no progressive JPEG compatibility.
Important
! When naming a JPEG picture file, add the cor-
responding filename extension (.jpg, .jpeg,
.jpe or .jfif).
! This unit plays back files with the filename ex-
tension (.jpg, .jpeg, .jpe or .jfif) as a JPEG pic-
ture file. To prevent malfunctions, do not use
these extensions for files other than JPEG pic-
ture files.
DivX video files
! Depending on the file information composi-
tion such as the number of audio stream,
there may be a slight delay in the start of
playback on discs.
! Some special operation may be prohibited
because of the composition of DivX files.
! DivX files downloaded only from DivX part-
ner site are guarantee of proper operation.
Unauthorized DivX file may not operate
properly.
! DRM rental file cannot be operated until
starting playing back.
! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display
up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also,
search operation beyond this time limit is
prohibited.
! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback
is stopped on the way.
Additional Information
En
97
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of
this unit to DivX VOD provider. About ID
code, refer to Displaying your DivX
®
VOD re-
gistration code on page 53.
! For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
DivX compatibility
! Compatible format: DivX video format im-
plemented in relation to DivX standards
! File extensions: .avi or .divx
! DivX Ultra format: No
! DivX HD format: No
! DivX files without video data: No
! Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby
Digital
! LPCM: No
! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! Compatible external subtitle file extension:
.srt
Using the display correctly
CAUTION
! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside
this unit, turn off the power immediately and
consult your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station. Do not use the unit
in this condition because doing so may result
in fire, electric shock, or other failure.
! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell,
or any other abnormal signs from the display,
turn off the power immediately and consult
your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station. Using this unit in
this condition may result in permanent da-
mage to the system.
! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as
there are high-voltage components inside
which may cause electric shock. Be sure to
consult your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station for internal inspec-
tion, adjustments, or repairs.
Handling the display
! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the
display when this unit is not being used.
Extended exposure to direct sunlight can
result in LCD screen malfunction due to
the resulting high temperatures.
! Never touch the screen with anything be-
sides your finger when operating the touch
panel function. The screen can scratch ea-
sily.
! When the display is subjected to direct sun-
light for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot resulting in possible
damage to the LCD screen. You should
avoid exposing the display unit to direct
sunlight as much as possible.
! The display should be used within the tem-
perature ranges shown below.
Storage temperature range: -20 °C to +80
°C
At temperatures higher or lower than the
operating temperature range, the display
may not operate normally.
! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle.
Please do not press strongly on it as this
may damage it.
! Do not place anything on the display when
it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carry
out angle adjustment, or open/close the
display by hand. Applying strong force to
the display may damage it.
! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as
this may scratch it.
! Be careful not to place anything between
the display and the main body when the
display is opening or closing. If an object
gets between the display and main body,
the display may stop working.
Additional Information
En
98
Appendix
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
! If the display is near the vent of an air con-
ditioner when it is opened, make sure that
air from the air conditioner is not blowing
on it. Heat from the heater may damage
the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool-
er may cause moisture to form inside the
display resulting in possible damage. Also,
if the display is cooled down by the cooler,
the screen may become dark, or the life
span of the small fluorescent tube used in-
side the display may be shortened.
! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are
due to the characteristics of the LCD
screen and do not indicate a problem with
the display.
! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may
be dark for a while after the power is turned
on.
! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
! When using a portable phone, keep the an-
tenna of the portable phone away from the
display to prevent disruption of the video by
the appearance of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
For viewing the LCD comfortably
Due to its construction, the viewing angle of
the screen size is limited. You can adjust it by
changing either screen size or picture adjust-
ment.
Changing the wide screen size
By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9,
you can adjust the screen so that the screen
can fit to the video image you are playing.
For details concerning operation, refer to
Changing the wide screen mode on page 58.
Changing the picture adjustment
You can make the best adjustment to the pic-
ture display by the Brightness, Contrast,
Color, Hue, Temperature and Black Level.
You can also dim or brighten the overall pic-
ture the Dimmer.
For details concerning operation, refer to
Changing the picture adjustment on page 59.
Keeping the display in good
condition
! When removing dust from the screen or
cleaning the display, first turn the system
power off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
! When wiping the screen, take care not to
scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or
abrasive chemical cleaners.
Small fluorescent tube
! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the
display to illuminate the LCD screen.
— The fluorescent tube should last for ap-
proximately 10 000 hours, depending on
operating conditions. (Using the display
at low temperatures reduces the service
life of the fluorescent tube.)
— When the fluorescent tube reaches the
end of its useful life, the screen will be
dark and the image will no longer be
projected. If this happens, consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station.
Additional Information
En
99
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Language code chart for DVD
Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721
French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814
German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815
Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904
Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907
Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909
Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911
Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912
Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913
Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914
Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915
Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917
Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918
Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919
Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920
Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921
Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923
Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001
Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005
Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008
Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011
Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012
Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014
Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tonga (to), 2015
Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018
Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019
Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020
Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023
Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118
Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126
Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapük (vo), 2215
Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315
Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408
Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515
Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601
Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612
Additional Information
En
100
Appendix
Copyright and trademark
notice
! This product incorporates copyright protec-
tion technology that is protected by method
claims of certain U.S. patents and other in-
tellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights
owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engi-
neering or disassembly is prohibited.
DVD video
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
WMA
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
! This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used
or distributed without a license from
Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
MP3
Supply of this product only conveys a license
for private, non-commercial use and does not
convey a license nor imply any right to use
this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad-
casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/
or other networks or in other electronic con-
tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or
audio-on-demand applications. An indepen-
dent license for such use is required. For de-
tails, please visit
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
iTunes
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
iPod
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Additional Information
En
101
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Dolby Pro Logic II
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS Digital Out
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent
#: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide pa-
tents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS
logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DivX
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
Additional Information
En
102
Appendix
Terms
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.
Bit rate
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
(bits per second) units. The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Chapter
DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters
which are numbered in the same way as the
chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea-
turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired
scene with chapter search.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-
pressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files
can also include advanced media features like
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.
Many DivX media files are available for down-
load online, and you can create your own
using your personal content and easy-to-use
tools from DivX.com.
DivX Certified
DivX Certified products are officially tested by
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio
from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is
the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound
system used in theaters.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band-
width output channels from two-channel
sources. This new technology enables a dis-
crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan-
nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A
music mode is also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the movie mode.
DTS
This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is
a surround system delivering multi-channel
audio from up to 6 independent channels.
Dynamic range control
Dolby Digital has a function for compressing
the difference between the loudest and softest
sounds: Dynamic range control. This control
ensures sounds with an increased dynamic
range are heard clearly even at low volume le-
vels.
EXIF (Exchangeable image file)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for
digital still cameras. Digital cameras from var-
ious manufacturers use this compressed file
format which carries date, time and thumbnail
information, as well as the picture data.
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted as to the num-
ber of characters, the information can be
viewed when the track is played back.
Additional Information
En
103
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
ISO9660 format
This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the
ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the
following two levels.
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English
capital letters and half-byte numerals and the
“_” sign, with a file-extension of three charac-
ters).
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-
cluding the separation mark “.” and a file ex-
tension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
JPEG
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts
Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard.
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code
modulation
This stands for linear pulse code modulation,
which is the signal recording system used for
music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re-
corded with higher sampling frequency and
bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide
higher sound quality.
m3u
Playlists created using the “WINAMP” soft-
ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard set by a working
group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan-
dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress
audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con-
ventional disc.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard. Some DVDs feature di-
gital audio compressed and recorded using
this system.
MS ADPCM
This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential
pulse code modulation, which is the signal re-
cording system used for the multimedia soft-
ware of Microsoft Corporation.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages
can be recorded on a single disc, letting you
choose as desired.
Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-
sions on one disc.
Multi-subtitle
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re-
corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as
desired.
Number of quantization bits
The number of quantization bits is one factor
in the overall sound quality; the higher the
“bit-depth”, the better the sound quality. How-
ever, increasing the bit-depth also increases
the amount of data and therefore storage
space required.
Additional Information
En
104
Appendix
Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing
on CD-R, etc., at the time required for a file,
just as is done with files on floppy or hard
discs.
Parental lock
Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for
children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.
Playback control (PBC)
This is a playback control signal recorded on
Video CDs (Version 2.0). Using menu displays
provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy
playback of simple interactive software and
software with search functions. You can also
enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution
still images.
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player.
Title
DVD video discs have high data capacity, en-
abling recording of multiple movies on a sin-
gle disc. If, for example, one disc contains
three separate movies, they are divided into
title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the
convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of audio compres-
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-
priority sound quality.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media™Audio
and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy that is developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by
using Windows Media Player version 7 or
later.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Additional Information
En
105
Appendix
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Specifications
General
Power source ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V
allowable)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
Max. current consumption
..................................................... 10.0 A
Dimensions (W × H × D):
DIN
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm × 165
mm
Nose ........................... 171 mm × 97 mm × 9 mm
Weight .......................................... 1.7 kg
Display
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 6.95 inch wide/16:9
(effective display area: 155.2
× 81.3 mm)
Pixels ............................................. 336 960 (1 440 × 234)
Display method ........................ TFT active matrix
Color system .............................. PAL/SECAM compatible
Durable temperature range (power off)
..................................................... -20 °C to +80 °C
Audio
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4
50 W × 2/4 W + 70 W × 1/2
W (for subwoofer)
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (1 kHz, 5% THD, 4
W load, both channels dri-
ven)
Load impedance ...................... 4 W to 8 W × 4
4 W to 8 W × 2 + 2 W × 1
Preout max output level ....... 4.0 V
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):
Low
Frequency ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
Mid
Frequency ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
High
Frequency ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
HPF:
Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct
Subwoofer (mono):
Frequency .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct
Gain ...................................... +6 dB to –24 dB
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse
Bass boost:
Gain ...................................... +12 dB to 0 dB
DVD Player
System .......................................... DVD video, DVD-VR, Video
CD, CD, WMA, MP3, AAC,
DivX, JPEG system
Usable discs .............................. DVD video, Video CD, CD,
CD-R/RW, DVD-R/RW/RDL
Region number ........................ 2
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency 96
kHz)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A net-
work) (RCA level)
Output level:
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W (±0.2 V)
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch
audio)
(Windows Media Player)
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-
coded only) (.m4a)
(Ver. 8.0 and earlier)
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver. 3, 4, 5.2,
6 (.avi, .divx)
USB
USB standard specification
..................................................... USB 1.1, USB 2.0 full speed
Maximum current supply .... 500 mA
USB Class ................................... MSC (Mass Storage Class)
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7, 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch
audio)
(Windows Media Player)
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-
coded only) (.m4a)
(Ver. 8.0 and earlier)
FM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IEC-A network)
MW tuner
Frequency range ...................... 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz (9 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IEC-A network)
LW tuner
Frequency range ...................... 153 kHz to 281 kHz
Usable sensitivity ..................... 28 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IEC-A network)
Note
Specifications and the design are subject to mod-
ifications without notice due to improvements.
Additional Information
En
106
Appendix
A
Angle icon ..................................................26,.51
Aspect ratio .............................................51,.103
Audio language ...................................25,.38,.50
B
Bookmark .........................................................24
Brightness ........................................................59
C
Chapter ...........................................................103
Code number ...................................................52
Color .................................................................59
Contrast ............................................................59
D
DivX ...................................................14,.102,.103
DivX Certified .................................................103
Dolby Digital ..............................................8,.103
Dolby Pro Logic II .................................102,.103
DTS .............................................................8,.103
Dynamic range control ................................103
E
EXIF .................................................................103
H
Hue ...................................................................59
J
JPEG ...............................................................104
L
Language code chart ...................................100
Linear PCM (LPCM) ......................................104
M
Menu language ...............................................51
MPEG ..............................................................104
Multi-angle ...............................................26,.104
Multi-audio .........................................25,.38,.104
Multi-subtitle ......................................26,.38,.104
P
Parental lock ............................................52,.105
PBC (playback control) ..................................28
Playback control (PBC) ................................105
R
Region number .........................................7,.105
S
Subtitle language ................................26,.38,.50
T
Title .................................................................105
TV aspect ..........................................................51
V
Video CD ..........................................................93
W
Wide screen mode ..........................................58
Index
En
107
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL: 55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
總公司: 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓
電話:(02) 2521-3588
先鋒電子(香港)有限公司
香港九龍尖沙嘴海港域世界商業中心
9樓901-6室
電話:(0852) 2848-6488
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright ©2008 by Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<CRB2878-A/N> EW <KSNZX> <08J00000>

Contents

Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product.
Please read through this manual before using the product for the first time, to ensure proper use. After reading, please keep the manual in a safe and accessible place for future reference.
Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 18 Tuning in strong signals 18 Selecting alternative frequencies 18 Receiving traffic announcements 19 Using PTY functions 20 PTY list 20 Playing DVD discs Watching a DVD 22 Selecting titles from the title list 23 Displaying information of DVD-VR 23 Skipping back or forward to another title 23 Operating the DVD menu 23 Selecting the play mode 24 Resume playback (Bookmark) 24 CM skip/CM back 24 Frame-by-frame playback 24 Slow motion playback 24 Pausing playback 25 Searching for the part you want to play 25 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 25 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 26 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 26 Return to the specified scene 26 Automatic playback of DVDs 26 Introduction of advanced DVD operation 26 Repeating play 27 Selecting audio output 27 Playing Video CDs Watching a Video CD 28 PBC playback 28 Frame-by-frame playback 29 Slow motion playback 29 Pausing playback 29 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time 29 Introduction of advanced Video CD operation 29

Be sure to read this ! DVD video disc region numbers 7 ! When an operation is prohibited 9 ! Handling guideline of discs and player 93 Precautions IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS 5 To ensure safe driving 5 To avoid battery exhaustion 6 Before You Start About this unit 7 About this manual 7 Visit our website 7 In case of trouble 8 Features 8 When an operation is prohibited 9 Resetting the microprocessor 9 Feature demo mode 9 What’s what Head unit 10 Optional remote control 10 Basic Operations Power ON/OFF 11 Selecting a source 11 Adjusting the volume 12 Touch panel key basic operation 12 Adjusting the LCD panel angle 14 Built-in DVD player basic operations 14 Radio Listening to the radio 16 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 17 Displaying the PTY information 17 Using radio text 17 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 18

2

En

Contents

Repeating play 30 Selecting audio output 30 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 31 Selecting tracks from the track title list 31 Pausing playback 31 Switching the media file type 32 Using advanced sound retriever 32 Introduction of advanced CD operation 32 Repeating play 32 Playing tracks in random order 32 Scanning tracks of a CD 32 Playing compressed audio Listening to compressed audio 33 Selecting files from the file name list 34 Pausing playback 34 Switching the media file type 34 Using advanced sound retriever 34 Introduction of advanced compressed audio operation 34 Repeating play 35 Playing tracks in random order 35 Scanning folders and tracks 35 Playing DivX/JPEG files Watching a DivX/JPEG 36 Viewing a JPEG slideshow 37 Playing DivX® VOD content 37 Selecting files from the file name list 37 Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc 38 Pausing playback 38 Switching the media file type 38 Searching for the part you want to play 38 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 38 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 38 Capture an image in JPEG files 38 Introduction of advanced DivX/JPEG operation 39

Repeating play 39 Playing files in random order 39 Playing songs in a USB storage device Basic Operations 40 Selecting files from the file name list 41 Pausing compressed audio playback 41 Switching the media file type 41 Using advanced sound retriever 41 Introduction to advanced operations 41 Using iPod Basic Operations 42 Playing video 43 Browsing for a song/video 43 Displaying text information on iPod Video 44 Pausing a song 44 Using advanced sound retriever 44 Repeating play 44 Playing songs/videos in a random order (shuffle) 45 Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) 45 Operating this unit’s iPod function from your iPod 45 Selecting songs from lists related to the currently playing song 45 Changing audiobook speed 45 Changing the screen mode 46 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 47 Using balance adjustment 47 Using the equalizer 47 Adjusting loudness 48 Using subwoofer output 48 Boosting the bass 48 Using the high pass filter 49 Adjusting source levels 49 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 50 Setting the subtitle language 50
En

3

Contents Setting the audio language 50 Setting the menu language 51 Setting the angle icon display 51 Setting the aspect ratio 51 Setting the slide show interval 51 Setting the parental lock 52 Setting the DivX subtitle file 52 Displaying your DivX® VOD registration code 53 Setting for digital output 53 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 54 Switching the auxiliary setting 54 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 54 Setting the FM tuning step 55 Switching Auto PI Seek 55 Selecting menu language 55 Switching the sound muting/attenuation 56 Setting the TV signal 56 Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 56 Correcting distorted sound 56 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 57 Resetting the audio functions 57 System settings Introduction of system adjustments 58 Changing the wide screen mode 58 Changing the picture adjustment 59 Setting the AV input 59 Setting the clock 60 Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) 60 Entertainment settings Introduction of entertainment settings 61 Selecting the background display 61 Selecting the illumination color 61 Selecting the OSD color 62 Other Functions Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (Touch Panel Calibration) 63 Using the AUX source 63 Using the external unit 64 Available accessories Bluetooth Audio 66 Bluetooth Telephone 68 TV tuner 75 Digital Signal Processor 76 Additional Information Troubleshooting 87 Error messages 89 Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages 91 Understanding messages 92 Handling guideline of discs and player 93 DVD discs 93 DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 94 AVCHD recorded discs 94 CD-R/CD-RW discs 94 Dual Discs 94 Compressed audio compatibility 95 Handling guideline and supplemental information 95 Example of a hierarchy 96 iPod compatibility 96 About handling the iPod 97 JPEG picture files 97 DivX video files 97 Using the display correctly 98 Language code chart for DVD 100 Copyright and trademark notice 101 Terms 103 Specifications 106 Index 107 4 En .

this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully before operating your display. 8 Never use headphones while driving. Installation or servicing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards.Section Precautions IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future reference. ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions carefully. will appear on the front display. Video CD or TV while driving. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. 01 Precautions WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself. Where such regulations apply. (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle’s operating systems or safety features. If you experience difficulty in operating the system or reading the display. hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely operate the vehicle. When you attempt to watch a DVD. To ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CONNECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. 9 To promote safety. the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. ! To avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision. If you are ever in an accident. 2 Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and safety information. 4 Do not allow other persons to use this system until they have read and understood the operating instructions. ! To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the potential violation of applicable laws. park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjustments. the warning Viewing of front seat video source while driving is strictly prohibited. and the vehicle is not in motion. your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. IMPROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DAMAGE. rear displays should not be in a location where they are visibly distracting to the driver. they must be obeyed and this unit’s DVD features should not be used. certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on. En 5 . Also. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. including air bags.

6 En . We recommend that you transcribe the audio adjustment data. WARNING ! SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Do not use for entertainment purposes. CAUTION ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers. Video CD or TV on the front display. OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. ! When no power is supplied to this unit because of a replacement of the vehicle battery or for some similar reason.Section 01 Precautions To watch a DVD. When using a rear view camera With an optional rear view camera. or backing into a tight parking spot. Using this unit without running the engine can result in battery drainage. WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. you are able to use this unit as an aid to keep an eye on trailers. park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. To avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. ! Please note that the edges of the rear view camera images may differ slightly according to whether full screen images are displayed when backing up. or while backing up. ! USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. When using a display connected to V OUT This unit’s V OUT is for connection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV. and whether the images are used for checking the rear when the vehicle is moving forward. the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition.

recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health. ! ! ! Private households in the member states of the EU. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! “CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT” This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use. Also. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment. please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by reading through the manual before you begin using this unit. If the battery is disconnected or discharged. It is especially important that you read and observe WARNINGs and CAUTIONs in this manual. but many are not self-explanatory. CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Protect this unit from moisture. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment. Asia. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. To ensure continued safety. in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one). do Visit our website Visit us at the following site: En 7 . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit and this manual (refer to Specifications on page 106). Electrical shock could result. The RDS (radio data system) function operates only in areas with FM stations broadcasting RDS signals. The Pioneer CarStereo-Pass is for use only in Germany. Keep this manual handy as a reference for operating procedures and precautions. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and operation.Section Before You Start not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. do not mix it with general household waste. 02 Before You Start ! ! If you want to dispose this product. smoke. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allocated for use in Western Europe. For countries not mentioned above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player. recovery and recycling. and overheating could result from contact with liquids. This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit’s potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. Africa and Oceania. damage to this unit. the Middle East. the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed.

UDF 1. In case of trouble Should this product fail to operate properly.g. MP3 and AAC file playback — JPEG file playback iPod compatibility This unit can control. MP3 file playback You can play back MP3 files recorded on CDR/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard). UDF 1. FAT 32). this unit realizes effortless hands-free phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology. contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station. DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard. WMA file playback You can play back WMA files recorded on CDR/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard). For details about the supported iPod. Features Touch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key. AAC file playback You can play back AAC files recorded on CDR/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard). listen to songs and view videos on an iPod. scroll bar and scrubber bar can be controlled at your fingertip. you can control Bluetooth audio player featuring Bluetooth wireless technology. DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard. CD playback Music CD/CD-R/RW playback is possible.g. UDF 1. DVD-R/RW/ROM (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 8 En . JPEG picture file playback You can play back JPEG picture files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and USB storage device. FAT 32). We will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft.) Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). 2 standard. Also.co. DivX® video compatibility Refer to DivX compatibility on page 98.pioneer. — USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) compliant portable audio player and memory — WMA. refer to iPod compatibility on page 96. Bluetooth audio player compatibility Using Bluetooth adapter (e. DVD-R/RW compatibility It is possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs recorded with the video format and Video Recording format. Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a Pioneer multichannel processor. CD-BTB200). ! We offer the latest information about Pioneer Corporation on our website.02) and USB storage device (FAT 16. (Refer to DVD-R/DVD-RW discs on page 94. Portable audio player compatibility ! Make inquiries to the manufacturer about your USB portable audio player/USB memory.Section 02 Before You Start http://www.uk ! Register your product.02) and USB storage device (FAT 16. you can enjoy the atmosphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel recordings. CD-BTB200). FAT 32).02) and USB storage device (FAT 16. This unit corresponds to the following. Hands-free phoning Using Bluetooth adapter (e.

the vehicle battery may be drained. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. it may not be performed because of the programming on the disc. Resetting the microprocessor Pressing RESET lets you reset the microprocessor to its initial settings without changing the bookmark information. 02 Before You Start RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factory) settings. Official DivX® Certified product Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. press and hold MUTE. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! Prior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages appear on the display 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF. When this happens. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. it may drain battery power.Section Before You Start About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX® video codec from DivX. If this is not done. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to perform an operation. To cancel the feature demo. Inc. keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. The demo continues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. the icon appears on the screen. switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET. individual DivX video files are called “Titles”. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning. En 9 . Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be connected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video. Feature demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source Off. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off. To restart the feature demo. press and hold MUTE again.

4 SRC/OFF button Press to cycle through all the available sources. To turn on the sound. 5 +/– (VOLUME) buttons Press to increase or decrease the volume. press again. 6 MUTE button Press to turn off the sound. Press and hold to turn the source off. fast forward. see the remote control manual. For details concerning operations.Section 03 What’s what 1 2 3 4 5 67 Head unit 1 RESET button Press to return to the factory settings (initial settings). reverse and track search controls. 10 En . 2 DISP OFF button Press to turn the information display on or off. 3 c/d (TRACK) buttons Press to do manual seek tuning. Optional remote control The remote control CD-R55 is sold separately. 7 h (eject) button Press to eject a disc from this unit.

— iPod is displayed when iPod is connected. % When using the button. press SRC/OFF and hold until the unit turns off. # When the source icon is not displayed. ! Charging the portable audio player using car’s DC power source while connecting it to AUX input may generate noise. In this case. Turning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys. touch the source icon and then touch Off. % When using the button. ! In the following cases. touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. press SRC/OFF repeatedly to select a desired source. ! Rear View (rear view camera) cannot be selected by pressing SRC/OFF. Turn off the AUX1 when not in use (refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 54). — USB/iPod is displayed when no device is connected. — USB is displayed when USB storage device is connected. the sound source will not change. load a disc in the unit.Section Basic Operations Power ON/OFF 1 ! TV – Television ! AV – AV input ! EXT-1 – External unit 1 ! EXT-2 – External unit 2 ! AUX-1 – AUX 1 ! AUX-2 – AUX 2 ! USB/iPod – USB/iPod ! Telephone – Bluetooth telephone ! BT-AUDIO – Bluetooth audio player ! Rear View – Rear view camera ! Off – Turn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed. you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button. The source names are displayed and selectable ones are highlighted. 04 Basic Operations 1 Source icon Turning the unit on % When using the touch panel keys. USB/iPod icon will be changed. To switch to the DVD player. — When no unit corresponding to the selected source is connected. — When there is no disc in the player. you can display it by touching the screen. Selecting a source You can select a source you want to listen to. # To close source select menu. — When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video (refer to page 59). touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. Notes ! In the following cases. touch ESC. you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. stop charging. % When using the touch panel keys. ! AUX1 is set to on by default. ! Disc – Built-in DVD player ! Radio – Radio En 11 . press SRC/OFF to turn the unit on. The source names are displayed and selectable ones are highlighted. — When AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 54). # While operating the menu.

they will be hidden automatically when selecting video sources. the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. When two external units are connected. ! When this unit’s blue/white lead is connected to the vehicle’s auto-antenna relay control terminal. # To go to the next group of touch panel keys. touch NEXT. Touch panel key basic operation Activating the touch panel keys 1 2 1 Information area Shows the various information depending on the source. refer to Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) on page 60. 2 Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. 12 En . turn the source off. Two external units can be controlled with this unit. The touch panel keys appear on the display. enables control of basic functions with this unit. # To return to the previous group of touch panel keys. To retract the antenna. For details. touch PREV. # If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds. ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that. 2 Touch panel keys Touch to do various operations.Section 04 Basic Operations ! Image from rear view camera can be displayed automatically when the appropriate setting is conducted. Adjusting the volume % Press + or – to adjust the sound level. although incompatible as a source. 1 Touch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. the vehicle’s antenna extends when this unit’s source is turned on.

3 Touch ESC to return to the display of each source. For the disc and USB storage device operation. The menu names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 1 Touch AV Menu to display MENU. 2 This unit features touch operation of scroll bar and scrubber bar. you can specify the playback point by dragging the scrubber bar.Section Basic Operations Operating the menu # When AV Menu is not displayed. 2 Audio Menu key Touch to switch to the sound quality control menu. you can display it by touching the screen. 4 Entertainment Menu key Touch to switch to the entertainment setup menu. Basic Operations Operating the scroll bar and the scrubber bar 1 1 Function Menu key Touch to switch to the functions for each source. 6 Back key Touch to return to the previous display. Scroll bar operation 1 Scroll bar En 13 . 3 System Menu key Touch to switch to the setup functions menu. you can drag the scroll bar on the left side of the menu to view the hidden objects. 04 2 Touch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. 5 ESC key Touch to cancel the control mode of functions. If the menu has multiple pages or list has more than five selections.

# If you are playing a DVD or Video CD. or adjusting the LCD panel. pressing h. Scrubber bar operation This operation is available for the following sources: ! DVD-video. # When a DVD (-R/-RW). Adjusting the LCD panel angle CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening. touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select Disc. closing. # Touching object. CD (-R/-RW) is loaded in this unit. DVD-VR ! Video CD ! CD ! Compressed audio files (disc/USB) ! DivX 2 Scrubber bar % Drag the scrubber bar on the screen to specify the playback point. Disc loading slot 1 Press h to display the ejecting menu. # When a DVD (-R/-RW). and then touching 14 En . # When the automatic playback function is on. drag upward or downward to view the hidden object. # The adjusted LCD panel angle will be memorized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. Refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 23 and PBC playback on page 28. # After a DVD (-R/-RW). Be especially cautious of children’s hands and fingers. 2 Touch Disc loading slot appears. # Drag operation is not available when the scrubber bar is grayout. CD (-R/-RW) has been inserted. # You can eject a DVD (-R/-RW). and playback will start. CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. to open the LCD panel. or can also display the hidden Built-in DVD player basic operations Playing a disc 1 Press h to display the ejecting menu. 3 Insert a DVD (-R/-RW). touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select Disc. or to adjust the LCD 2 Touch panel to an easily viewable angle. CD (-R/-RW) by .Section 04 Basic Operations % If you see the scroll bar on the left side of the screen. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a DVD (-R/-RW). # LCD display angle can be adjusted to 5 different positions. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 26. LCD panel is closed automatically. CD (-R/-RW) is loaded in this unit. a menu may appear. CD (-R/-RW). use touch panel keys to select the DVD player. this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automatically start playback from the first chapter of the first title.

Section Basic Operations Notes ! The DVD player plays one. you can switch between media file types to play. 12-cm DVD (-R/-RW). Playing back an 8-cm disc is not possible with this unit. Stops playback. chapter or file. — Audio data (CD-DA) — Compressed audio files — DivX video files — JPEG picture files ! In case of DVD-R/RW/ROM. Skips to the start of the current track. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. Key f g What it does Starts playback. then to previous tracks/chapters/files. Refer to Switching the media file type on this page. 04 Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. standard. refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 24. ! If an error message is displayed. pauses a disc that’s playing or restarts a paused disc. Press h and then touch and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. CD (-R/-RW) contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play. CD (-R/-RW) at a time. refer to Error messages on page 89. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read. For more details. DVD playback resumes from the selected point. Note You may find with some DVD or Video CD discs that some playback controls do not work in certain parts of the disc. The following chapters cover other playback features in more details. check that the label side of the disc is up. ! Performs fast reverse by touching and holding o. CD (-R/-RW) into the disc loading slot. ! Performs fast forward by touching and holding p. chapter or file. you can switch between media file types to play. Format Read is displayed. ! Do not insert anything other than a DVD (-R/RW). o p En 15 . ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. Skips to the next track. ! If a DVD (-R/-RW). This is not a malfunction. this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA) or JPEG picture files. ! If bookmark function is on. to eject the disc. Touch Media repeatedly to switch between the following media file types: CD (audio data (CD-DA))—ROM-Audio (compressed audio)—DivX (DivX video files)— JPEG (JPEG picture files) Basic Operations Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls for playing discs.

1 2 3 9 8 a Non-RDS or MW/LW 2 Touch Band to select a band. MW/LW or FM. 4 To perform seek tuning. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key. 7 Text indicator Shows when the radio text is received. 9 Frequency indicator Shows the frequency to which the tuner is tuned. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting in the following section. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. briefly touch c or d. a Local indicator Appears when local seek tuning is on. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. 3 To perform manual tuning. FM3 for FM or MW/LW) is displayed. 6 TRFC indicator Appears when a TP station is tuned in. RDS 8 7 65 8 5 (stereo) indicator Appears when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 16 En . 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Radio to select the radio. Touch Band until the desired band (FM1. These are the basic steps necessary to operate the radio. ! This unit’s AF (alternative frequencies search) function can be turned on and off. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip stations. Refer to page 18. ! RDS (radio data system) contains inaudible information that helps search for the radio stations. keep touching c or d for about one second and release. 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. FM2. 5 NEWS indicator Appears when the set news program is received.Section 05 Radio Listening to the radio 1 2 3 4 4 Program service name Shows the name of broadcast program (program service name). AF should be off for normal tuning operation (refer to page 18). # You can also perform seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). # You can also perform manual tuning by pressing c or d (TRACK).

Using radio text This tuner can display radio text data transmitted by RDS stations. ! RDS functions such as AF and TA are only active when your radio is tuned to an RDS station. The next time you press the same button in the radio text display the stored text is recalled from memory. Radio text for the currently broadcasting station is displayed. Displaying the PTY information PTY (program type ID code) information can be displayed. 1 Touch Text to display radio text.Section Radio Notes ! Listening MW/LW radio while an iPod is charged from this unit may generate noise. # When no radio text is received. 2 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep sounds. 05 PTY (program type ID code) information is listed in the following section. # You can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6. ! The tuner automatically memorizes the three latest radio text broadcasts received. En 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. % Touch INFO. 1 Touch List to display the preset list. such as station information. Radio Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies You can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall. Displaying radio text You can display the currently received radio text and the three most recent radio texts. PTY is displayed for eight seconds. No Text appears in the display. disconnect the iPod from this unit. 1 Display the radio text you want to store in memory. Refer to page 20. ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memory. replacing text from the least recent reception with new text when it is received. Refer to Displaying radio text on this page. In this case. Storing and recalling radio text You can store data from up to six radio text transmissions for keys Memo 1 to Memo 6. ! RDS service may not be provided by all stations. # When P1 to P6 are not displayed. # If there is no radio text data in memory the display will not change. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. you can display them by touching List. 17 . The memory number will display and the selected radio text will be stored in memory. # You can cancel radio text display by touching ESC. The next time you touch the same preset tuning key the radio station frequency is recalled from memory. 2 Touch any keys Memo 1 to Memo 6 and hold to store the selected radio text. 2 Touch PREV or NEXT to recall the three most recent radio texts. the name of the currently broadcast song and the name of the artist.

# To turn AF off. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memory) automatically stores the six strongest broadcast frequencies in the order of their signal strength. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 Touch ESC to return to the frequency display. # To return to the previous display.) No preset number appears on the display if the RDS data for the station received differs from that for the originally stored station. ! AF can be turned on or off independently for each FM band. PI Seek is displayed and the output is muted. Selecting alternative frequencies When the tuner cannot get a good reception. ! When you recall a preset station. while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. When finished. Touch Local repeatedly until the desired level of sensitivity appears in the display. ! Sound may be temporarily interrupted by another program during an AF frequency search. % Touch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. touch BSM again. There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for MW/LW: FM: Off—Level1—Level2—Level3—Level4 Using PI Seek If the tuner cannot find a suitable station. or reception status becomes bad. the tuner may update the preset station with a new frequency from the station’s AF list. BSM stops flashing. 18 En . % Touch AF on the function menu to turn AF on. MW/LW: Off—Level1—Level2 Larger setting number is higher level. During the search. the unit automatically searches for a different station in the same network. the unit automatically searches for a different station with the same programming. touch AF again. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 to P6.Section 05 Radio Introduction of advanced tuner operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. BSM begins to flash. touch Back. (This is only available when using presets on the FM1 or FM2 bands. % Touch Local on the function menu to set the sensitivity. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength. Tuning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. Notes ! Only RDS stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when AF is on. The highest level setting allows reception of only the strongest stations. # To cancel the storage process.

# If you turned TA function on while tuned in to neither a TP nor an enhanced other network’s TP station. touch Regional again. # To turn traffic announcements standby off. ! The preset number may disappear from the display if the tuner tunes in a regional station which differs from the originally set station. no matter what source you are listening to.e. ! The default setting for Auto PI Seek is off. Radio Receiving traffic announcements TA (traffic announcement standby) lets you receive traffic announcements automatically.Section Radio Using Auto PI Seek for preset stations When preset stations cannot be recalled. ! Only TP and enhanced other network’s TP stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when TA is on. ! The regional function can be turned on or off independently for each FM band. touch TA again. TA can be activated for both a TP station (a station that broadcasts traffic information) or an enhanced other network’s TP station (a station carrying information which cross-references TP stations). TRFC indicator lights. # To turn the regional function off. Notes ! Regional programming and regional networks are organized differently depending on the country (i. Notes ! The system switches back to the original source following traffic announcement reception. state or broadcast area). 2 Touch TA on the function menu. Refer to Switching Auto PI Seek on page 55. The newly set volume is stored in memory and recalled for subsequent traffic announcements. 05 Limiting stations to regional programming When AF is used. as when travelling long distances. 4 Touch TA while a traffic announcement is being received to cancel the announcement. they may change according to the hour. The tuner returns to the original source but remains in the standby mode until TA is touched again. % Touch Regional on the function menu to turn the regional function on. dimmed TRFC indicator lights.. En 19 . the unit can be set to perform PI Seek during preset recall. 3 Press +/– (VOLUME) to adjust the TA volume when a traffic announcement begins. 1 Tune in a TP or enhanced other network’s TP station. the regional function limits the selection of stations broadcasting regional programs. Traffic announcement standby is now on. dTRFC appears in the display.

Popular music Contemporary modern music Easy listening music Non-categorized music Jazz Country music National music Oldies. such as those listed in the following section. # The program of some stations may differ from that indicated by the transmitted PTY. # To turn off news program interruption. Refer to this page. the system returns to the previous source. When the broadcasting ends. trading. When a station is found. touch NEWS again. Not Found is displayed for about two seconds and then the tuner returns to the original station. When the news program ends. PTY (program type ID code) information is listed in the following section. etc. golden oldies Folk music Light classical music Classical music 2 Touch c or d to select a program type. Searching for an RDS station by PTY information You can search for general types of broadcasting programs. Refer to this page. Receiving PTY alarm broadcasts When the emergency PTY code broadcasts. Classics Folk Mus L. PTY list General News&Inf Specific News Affairs Info Sport Weather Finance Popular Pop Mus Rock Mus Easy Mus Oth Mus Jazz Country Nat Mus Oldies Type of program News Current affairs General information and advice Sports Weather reports/meteorological information Stock market reports. the unit can switch from any station to the news broadcast station. There are four program types: News&Inf—Popular—Classics—Others 3 Touch d to begin the search.Section 05 Radio Using PTY functions You can tune in a station by using PTY (program type) information. touch c. # If no station is broadcasting the type of program you searched for. Class Classic 20 En . # A news program can be canceled by touching NEWS. 1 Touch PTY on the function menu. The unit searches for a station broadcasting that program type. commerce. the unit receives it automatically (ALARM appears). reception of the previous program resumes. % Touch NEWS on the function menu. News program interruption standby is now on. Using news program interruption When a news program is broadcast from a PTY code news station. its program service name is displayed. # To cancel the search.

not for traffic announcements Hobbies and recreational activities Documentaries 05 En 21 Radio .Section Radio Others Educate Drama Culture Science Varied Children Social Religion Phone In Touring Leisure Document Educational programs Radio plays and serials National or regional culture Nature. science and technology Light entertainment Children’s Social affairs Religious affairs or services Phone in Travel programs.

(Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page. touch o or p. Touching p skips to the start of the next chapter. 3 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current chapter. (Refer to page 14. 6 Digital format indicator Shows when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. Touching o once skips to the start of the current chapter. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. 3 To skip back or forward to another chapter. only the number of the audio language is displayed. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected.Section 06 Playing DVD discs Watching a DVD 1 2 3 4 5 Audio language indicator Shows which audio language has been selected. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.) # With some discs. 22 En . 7 Channel/sampling frequency/quantization bits Depending on the file format. For DVD-VR. More advanced DVD operation is explained starting in the following section. Insert a disc in the unit. # You can also skip back or forward to another chapter by pressing c or d (TRACK). 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys.) 5 67 8 9 DVD video 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a DVD-VR These are the basic steps necessary to play a DVD with your DVD player. 9 Viewing angle indicator Shows which viewing angle has been selected. a Playing method indicator Shows which playing method (ORIGINAL LIST or PLAYLIST) has been selected. Refer to page 26. some information may not be displayed. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. Touching it again will skip to the previous chapter. 8 Subtitle language indicator Shows which subtitle language has been selected. a menu may be displayed.

normal playback automatically resumes. Touching a skips to the start of the next title. # To switch to the DVD menu direct touch control. # Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. To resume playback at a desired point.Section Playing DVD discs 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. 2 Touch a. ! This function is available for DVD-VR. % Touch the desired menu item on the DVD menu directly. % Touch INFO. 1 Touch List. If this happens. touch a or b. using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu. For details. Touching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. If you keep touching o or p for five seconds. Playing DVD discs Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. Using the touch panel keys 1 Touch to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. those characters will not be displayed. Using DVD menu direct touch control This function allows you to operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item directly. 06 Skipping back or forward to another title % To skip back or forward to another title. keep touching o or p. the icon m or n is highlighted.. Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Indicators—title name # If specific information has not been recorded on a DVD-VR disc. touch Touch. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). When this happens. That selection will begin to play. In this case. refer to the instructions provided with the disc. touch f. ! This function is available for DVD video. Selecting titles from the title list Title list lets you see the list of titles on a disc and select one of them to play back. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. b. ! You can display the menu by touching Menu or Top Menu while a disc is playing. Touching b skips to the start of the previous title. 2 Touch your favorite title.g. # If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit. fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p. you can display them by touching the screen. ! This function is available for DVD-VR. No xxxx will be displayed (e. # Depending on the contents of DVD discs. Displaying information of DVD-VR Information of DVD-VR can be displayed. No Title). # When the touch panel keys are not displayed. En 23 . c or d to select the desired menu item. this function may not work properly.

% Touch Mode Change to switch the play mode.—0 sec. Selecting the play mode You have two methods for playing DVD-VR disc. forward slow motion playback begins.—2. it is possible to skip them. ! This function is available for DVD-VR. Next time you load the disc.—3.—15 sec. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume playback from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded.5 min. # The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. touch r while displaying a still image to switch to the next image or video. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. # If a DVD-VR disc contains a still image.0 min. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Titles created with DVD recorders are called original. CM skip/CM back This function skips a reproduced image for a specified time. playback starts from the beginning of the selected play mode. % To skip progressively backward or forward. % Keep touching r until is displayed during playback.0 min. # To return to normal playback. Based on original.—5.—1. Each time you touch or it changes steps in the following order: CM back 5 sec. press h. images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback. To clear the bookmark on a disc. % During playback. # Touching q or r during slow motion playback. # You can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding h at the point you want to bookmark.—2.Section 06 Playing DVD discs 3 Touch . CM skip 30 sec. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed.—3. The icon is displayed. If the play mode is changed. Each time you touch r.0 min. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time.—10. 24 En . Playback starts from the selected menu item. keep touching Bookmark during playback. # To clear the bookmark on a disc.0 min. touch f. If the currently playing disc contains commercials. you move ahead one frame.0 min. touch Bookmark at the point you want to resume playback next time. ORIGINAL LIST (original) and PLAYLIST (playlist). touch or . rearranged titles are called playlist. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback.—0 sec.—30 sec.0 min.—1. Playlists are created on DVD-R/RW discs.—1. % Touch r during playback. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method.0 min. touch f. playback will resume from the bookmarked point. # You can bookmark up to six discs including the disc that is bookmarked using h.0 min. you can change the playback speed in four steps as follows: 1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2 # To return to normal playback. # With some discs.

3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number. DTS etc. images may be unclear during slow motion playback. switching between languages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display. Chapter (chapter). touch f again. ! Touching Audio during fast forward/fast reverse. convert the time into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0. DTS audio will not be output. you can select Title (title). En 25 . ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. If this unit’s optical digital outputs are not connected. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible.). Each time you touch Audio it switches between audio systems. For DVD video. 4 Touch . This starts playback from the selected part.1 ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. ! Chapter search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. Chapter (chapter) or Time (time). 0 and 0 in that order. With DVDs featuring multiaudio recordings. Note With discs featuring a menu. 2 Touch the desired search option (e. Time (time) or 10key (numeric keypad). ! With some discs. 7. Notes ! With some DVDs. For DVD-VR. to select 1 hour 11 minutes. Chapter). ! You can also switch between languages/audio systems using Setup.Section Playing DVD discs Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion playback. you can also touch Menu or Top Menu and then make selections from the displayed menu. 06 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with different languages and different systems (Dolby Digital.g. you can select Title (title). refer to Setting the audio language on page 50. 1 Touch Search. you can switch between languages/audio systems during playback. # To cancel the inputted numbers. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. touch C. For details. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.. Playing DVD discs Searching for the part you want to play You can use the search function to find the part you want to play. playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. % Touch Audio during playback. 1. so select an audio setting other than DTS. Depending on the setting. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. # In the time search function.

% Touch Angle during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. touch Auto Play again. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. For details. Notes ! With some DVDs. ! Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast reverse. % Touch Subtitle during playback. Return to the specified scene You can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. this unit will cancel the DVD menu automatically and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 50. you cannot operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on the next page). Each time you touch Subtitle it switches between subtitle languages. 26 En . Introduction of advanced DVD operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. % Touch Return to return to the specified scene. # To return to the previous display. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted. If this function is not fully operated. touch Back. For details. Note Touching Angle during fast forward/fast reverse. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! This function is available for DVD video. turn this function off and start playback. refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 51.Section 06 Playing DVD discs Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings. # When the automatic playback is on. you can switch among viewing angles during playback. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. ! You can also switch between subtitle languages using Setup. # To turn automatic playback off. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly. # If a specified scene has not been preprogrammed in DVD disc. Turn angle icon display on or off using Setup. switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display. % Touch Auto Play to turn automatic playback on. you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. ! During playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. ! This function is available for DVD video. this function is not possible. the angle icon is displayed. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings.

Section

Playing DVD discs Repeating play
There are three repeat play ranges for DVD playback. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range.
! Disc – Play through the current disc ! Chapter – Repeat the current chapter ! Title – Repeat the current title # If you perform chapter search or fast forward/ reverse, the repeat play range changes to Disc.

06

Playing DVD discs

Selecting audio output
When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. ! If you select Linear PCM, when playing a disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you can operate this function. (Refer to Setting for digital output on page 53.) % Touch L/R Select on the function menu to select the audio output. Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display.
! L+R – left and right ! Left – left ! Right – right ! Mix – mixing left and right # Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not possible.

En

27

Section

07

Playing Video CDs Watching a Video CD
1 2 3
# During PBC playback, a menu may be displayed if you perform these operations. # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRACK).

These are the basic steps necessary to play a Video CD with your DVD player. More advanced Video CD operation is explained starting in the following section. Refer to the next page. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. 2 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track playing. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player.
# If no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select Disc (DVD player). Insert a disc in the unit. (Refer to page 14.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to PBC playback on this page.)

4 To perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. If you keep touching o or p for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p. To resume playback at a desired point, touch f.

# Fast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this happens, normal playback automatically resumes. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK).

PBC playback
During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. You can operate PBC menu with 10key. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch Search and then touch 10key.
# Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu.

2 Touch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch to start playback. Playback starts from the selected menu item. 3 Touch ESC to hide the touch panel keys.
Notes ! You can display the menu by touching Return during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of Video CD cannot be canceled.

2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys.
# Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys.

3 To skip back or forward to another track, briefly touch o or p. Touching p skips to the start of the next track. Touching o once skips to the start of the current track. Touching it again will skip to the previous track.

28

En

Section

Playing Video CDs
! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play.

07 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time
You can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specifying a track, and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be operated. ! Time search is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. 1 Touch Search.

Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Touch r during playback. Each time you touch r, you move ahead one frame.
# To return to normal playback, touch f. # With some discs, images may be unclear during frame-by-frame playback.

Playing Video CDs

2 Touch Track (track), Time (time) or 10key (numeric keypad). 3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number.
# To cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0, 7, 1, 0 and 0 in that order.

Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed. % Keep touching r until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, forward slow motion playback begins.
# Touching q or r during slow motion playback, you can change the playback speed in four steps as follows: 1/16—1/8—1/4—1/2 # To return to normal playback, touch f. Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion playback. ! With some discs, images may be unclear during slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible.

4 Touch . This starts playback from the selected scene.

Introduction of advanced Video CD operation
1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display.

Pausing playback
% Touch f during playback.
# To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch f again.

# To return to the previous display, touch Back.

En

29

! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. this function cannot be operated. ! Disc – Repeat the current disc ! Track – Repeat the current track # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse. Touch L/R Select repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). Selecting audio output You can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. the repeat play range changes to Disc. % Touch L/R Select on the function menu to select the audio output. ! ! ! ! L+R – left and right Left – left Right – right Mix – mixing left and right 30 En .Section 07 Playing Video CDs Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the Video CD playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc (disc repeat).

Section Playing CDs Listening to a CD 1 2 4 5 6 7 3 2 To skip back or forward to another track. 08 3 To perform fast forward or reverse. Touching o once skips to the start of the current track. briefly touch o or p. No Name). 5 Disc artist name indicator Shows the artist name of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT disc. 6 Track name list display Shows the track name list only when playing CD TEXT disc. No xxxx will be displayed (e. That selection will begin to play. Insert a disc in the unit. # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRACK). Note Playing CDs If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. Refer to the next page. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). When playing a CD TEXT disc. (Refer to page 14. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected.) # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). keep touching o or p. 2 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track playing. These are the basic steps necessary to play a CD with your DVD player. touch f again. track titles are displayed. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. En 31 . 2 Touch your favorite track title. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. 4 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs.. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. Touching it again will skip to the previous track. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. 7 Track artist name indicator Shows the artist name of the currently playing track only when playing CD TEXT disc. Touching p skips to the start of the next track. Selecting tracks from the track title list Track title list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back.g. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. More advanced CD operation is explained starting in the following section. 1 Touch List.

# When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA). Introduction of advanced CD operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. Repeating play There are two repeat play ranges for the CD playback: Track (track repeat) and Disc (disc repeat). repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if Disc is selected. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. # After scanning of a CD is finished. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 15. ! Disc – Repeat the current disc ! Track – Repeat the current track # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. the volume will become slightly lower. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. the repeat play range changes to Disc. Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. # To turn random play off. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. touch Random again. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. Tracks play in a random order. normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order. Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. 32 En . 1 Touch Scan on the function menu to turn scan play on.Section 08 Playing CDs Switching the media file type If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. touch Back. Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. 2 When you find the desired track touch Scan again. you can switch between media file types to play. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. # To return to the previous display. % Touch Random on the function menu to turn random play on.

playback commences with folder 02. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. keep touching o or p. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. Playing compressed audio 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. Insert a disc in the unit. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing.. No xxxx will be displayed (e. 1 Source icon Shows the media type currently playing. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a compressed audio recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVDR/RW/ROM. # You can also skip back or forward to another file by pressing c or d (TRACK). Touching p skips to the start of the next file. touch o or p. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a compressed audio disc. Touch a or b to select a folder. Refer to the next page. (Refer to page 14. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. Touching it again will skip to the previous file. No Artist). Touching o once skips to the start of the current file. En 33 .g.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files. 3 To skip back or forward to another file. More advanced compressed audio operation is explained starting in the following section. 5 File name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing file. you cannot select Disc (DVD player). Folders are skipped if they contain no files. 6 Album title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing album.) 09 4 2 # You cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. 9 Folder name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing folder.Section Playing compressed audio Listening to compressed audio 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 These are the basic steps necessary to play a compressed audio with your DVD player. 7 Artist name indicator Shows the artist name of the currently playing file. 8 Track title indicator Shows the name of the currently playing track. 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). Refer to page 95) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number.

Switching the media file type If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. Introduction of advanced compressed audio operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. # To return to folder 01 (ROOT). % Touch Media to switch between media file types. Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. # To return to the previous list (the folder one level higher). # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. 2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder name). touch Back. switch between media file types to play. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . touch Back. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. # When you have selected a folder. ! Text information may not be correctly displayed depending on the recorded environment. playback commences with folder 02. a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # To return to the previous display. those characters will not be displayed. if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. touch and hold Back. Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound.Section 09 Playing compressed audio ! If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit. However. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. Repeat this operation to select the desired file name. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. you can 34 En . Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. touch f again. the volume will become slightly lower. That selection will begin to play. Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 15. 1 Touch List.

# If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during File. En 35 . touch Random again. 2 When you find the desired track (or folder) touch Scan again. % Touch Random on the function menu to turn random play on. When you are using Disc. there are three repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat). File (one-track repeat) and Disc (repeat all tracks). The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. # After track or folder scanning is finished. # When Folder is selected. the repeat play range changes to Folder. Tracks will play in a random order within the previously selected Folder or Disc ranges. the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds.Section Playing compressed audio Repeating play For compressed audio playback. 09 1 Touch Scan on the function menu to turn scan play on. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using Folder. ! Disc – Repeat all tracks ! File – Repeat the current track ! Folder – Repeat the current folder # If you select another folder during repeat play. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. # When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA). it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder. Folder and Disc. repeat play performs within the currently playing data type even if Disc is selected. normal playback of the tracks will begin again. the repeat play range changes to Disc. Playing compressed audio Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range. # To turn random play off.

Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files Watching a DivX/JPEG 1 2 3 4 3 Touch a or b to select a folder. Insert a disc in the unit. 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. playback commences with folder 02. Refer to page 97. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). Touching it again will skip to the previous file. Folders are skipped if they contain no files. 36 En . play time indicator does not appear. # When playing JPEG file. performing this operation enables you to search every 10 files. To resume playback at a desired point. Touching p skips to the start of the next file. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ ROM. ! When playing a JPEG disc. # You can also skip back or forward to another file by pressing c or d (TRACK). More advanced DivX/JPEG operation is explained starting in the following section. When DivX disc is playing. 4 To skip back or forward to another file.) 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Disc to select the DVD player. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. touch o or p. # If no disc is loaded in the unit. the icon m or n is highlighted. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. keep touching o or p. Refer to page 97. 5 These are the basic steps necessary to play a DivX/JPEG with your DVD player. # You cannot select a folder that does not have a DivX/JPEG file recorded in it. (Refer to page 14. 5 File name indicator Shows the name of the currently playing file. Touching o once skips to the start of the current file. if you keep touching o or p for five seconds. touch f. This operation is canceled when the previous or next file is reached.) ! This unit can play back a JPEG file recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM or USB storage device. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. (Please see the following section for files that can be played back. fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p. Refer to page 39. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number. you cannot select Disc (DVD player).) 5 To perform fast forward or reverse. # This is fast forward and reverse operation only for the file being played. When this happens.

touch Back. refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registration code on page 53. pauses the slideshow or restarts a paused disc. touch Play. 1 Touch List. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. Playing DivX/JPEG files Playing DivX® VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. touch Next Play. Displays the previous picture. # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD content. The table below shows the controls for viewing a slideshow. # To skip to the next file. a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit. # When you have selected a folder. the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays). 3 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. content that has zero remaining plays). touch Stop.Section Playing DivX/JPEG files Viewing a JPEG slideshow When loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG picture files. Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. ® % If the message is displayed after loading a disc containing DivX VOD content. you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example. # To return to the previous list (the folder one level higher). Rental Expired. About your regis- 2 Touch your favorite file name (or folder name). and no message will be displayed. is displayed. or stopping. this unit automatically starts a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. That selection will begin to play. Rotates the displayed picture 90° clockwise. Key f o p What it does Starts the slideshow. This restricts playback of content to specific. registered devices. Displays the next picture. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. then you may load the disc into your player and play the content as often as you like. ! Playable number of times is displayed with Remaining Views:. 10 tration code. Repeat this operation to select the desired file name. En 37 . ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays.

Section 10 Playing DivX/JPEG files Displaying text information on DivX/JPEG disc Text information recorded on a DivX/JPEG disc can be displayed. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) You can switch subtitle language during playback when playing file recorded with subtitles in one or more languages. and recall easily. ! This function is available for DivX disc. touch C. Each time you touch Subtitle it switches between subtitle languages. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 15. convert the time into 071 minutes 00 seconds and touch 0. 1. pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. ! This function is available for DivX disc. touch f again. Touch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Folder Name (folder name)—File Name (file name) # If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit. % Touch Subtitle during playback. 7. # Touching Subtitle during fast forward/fast reverse. 38 En . pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Images can be stored in this unit. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. ! This function is available for JPEG disc. those characters will not be displayed. This starts playback from the selected part. you can switch between media file types to play. # To cancel the inputted numbers. ! This function is available for DivX disc. Each time you touch Audio it switches between audio systems. Switching the media file type If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3. % Touch INFO. 0 and 0 in that order. 3 Touch . 1 Touch Search. # To select 1 hour 11 minutes. Pausing playback % Touch f during playback. Capture an image in JPEG files Image data can be captured in order to use it for wallpaper. % Touch Audio during playback. % Touch Media to switch between media file types. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) You can switch audio language during playback when playing a file recorded with dialog in two or more languages. Searching for the part you want to play You can use the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number. # Touching Audio during fast forward/fast reverse.

! This function is available for JPEG disc. 3 When Do you save this image? is displayed. While storing the image to this unit. Files will play in a random order within the previously selected Folder or Disc ranges. touch Yes. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. For JPEG picture file playback. % Touch Repeat on the function menu to select the repeat range. the repeat play range changes to Disc. is displayed. % Touch Random on the function menu to turn random play on. there are two repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat) and Disc (repeat all files). 1 Touch f to pause the slideshow when the desired image is displayed. ! Disc – Repeat all files ! Folder – Repeat the current folder ! File – Repeat just the current file En 39 . Introduction of advanced DivX/JPEG operation 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. # If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during File. # To return to the previous display. Old image is overwitten with new one. 10 Playing files in random order When playing a JPEG disc. # To turn random play off. Image saved is displayed. touch No. After stored completely. Folder and Disc. touch Random again. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # If you select another folder during repeat play. 2 Touch Capture. Playing DivX/JPEG files Repeating play For DivX video file playback. the repeat play range changes to Folder. random play lets you play back files in a random order within the repeat range. touch Back. # When Folder is selected.Section Playing DivX/JPEG files ! This unit can store only one image data. File (file repeat) and Disc (repeat all files). Saving the image Don't switch off the battery. Captureing the image is displayed. there are three repeat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat). it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder. # To cancel the strorage process.

# You can also skip back or forward to another file by pressing c or d (TRACK). refer to Error messages on page 89. playback commences with folder 02. If you do not use an USB device. 40 En . # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). you can display it by touching the screen. 2 # You cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. ! If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files. refer to Portable audio player compatibility on page 8. Touching o once skips to the start of the current file. the battery is charged. # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. keep touching o or p.Section 11 Playing songs in a USB storage device Basic Operations 1 2 3 4 3 To skip back or forward to another compressed audio file. ! Last four-digit can be displayed as the file number. briefly touch o or p. ! If USB portable audio player/USB memory is connected to this unit. the source is changed to USB automatically. Depending on the connected USB device. Touching p skips to the start of the next file. Notes ! Optimum performance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memory. Touch a or b to select a folder. 1 Source icon Shows the media type currently playing. ! You can disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memory anytime you want to finish listening to it. ! If an error message or icon is displayed. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch USB to select the USB. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit. ! When the USB portable audio player having battery charging function is connected to this unit and the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. turning on the ignition switch while USB device is connected to this unit may change the source automatically. Touching it again will skip to the previous file. disconnect it from this unit. # When the source icon is not displayed. 3 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 4 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. 5 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. Operation of JPEG in a USB storage device is the same as JPEG on a disc. 5 For details about the supported device. those characters will not be displayed. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. ! Text information may not be correctly displayed depending on the recorded environment. 4 To perform fast forward or reverse.

Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off. If a USB portable audio player/USB memory contains compressed audio files and JPEG file.Section Playing songs in a USB storage device Selecting files from the file name list The operation is the same as that of the builtin DVD player. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. 11 Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player. ! After file or folder scanning is finished. ! When Folder is selected. Random and Scan operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player. 2 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. En 41 . Refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 34. # To return to the previous display. you can switch between media file types to play. However. ! If you perform track search or fast forward/reverse during File. the repeat play range changes to Folder. touch Back. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder. the repeat play range changes to All. the volume will become slightly lower. Refer to Switching the media file type on page 15. touch f again. Switching the media file type The operation is the same as that of the builtin DVD player. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. normal playback of the files begins again. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. The repeat play ranges of the USB portable audio player/USB memory are: ! File – Repeat just the current file ! Folder – Repeat the current folder ! All – Repeat all files Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 35. Random Scan Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play. Pausing compressed audio playback % Touch f during playback. Refer to Scanning folders and tracks on page 35. Function name Operation Refer to Repeating play on page 35. Function and operation Repeat. Playing songs in a USB storage device Repeat Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound.

42 En . To resume playback at a desired point. Refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 54. No Name). 2 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is set to or . fast reverse/fast forward continues even if you release o or p. keep touching o or p. touch o or p. which is sold separately. the iPod cannot be turned on or off. # Before connecting the dock connector of this unit to the iPod. ! If an iPod with video capabilities is connected to this unit via interface cable (e. this unit is turned off. When this happens. the iPod’s battery is charged while the iPod is connected to this unit. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch iPod to select the iPod. # When the source icon is not displayed. which is sold separately. # When removing the iPod from this unit.. set the AUX1 to iPod. 3 To perform fast forward or reverse. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). touch o or p to select a chapter. 5 ! You can use this unit to control an iPod by using a cable (e.. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. CD-IU50). you can display it by touching the screen. ! If specific information is not recorded on the iPod. Refer to page 97. there may be a delay to start playing after connection. # After the iPod has been connected to this unit. CD-IU200V). Accessory Attached or (check mark) is displayed on the iPod. 4 When playing a file with chapter. 5 Song information Shows detailed information of currently playing song. ! The iPod is turned off about two minutes after the ignition switch is set to OFF.g. ! When the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. you can enjoy the video contents of the iPod as the iPod source. 2 To skip back or forward to another song. ! Connect directly the dock connector cable to the iPod so that this unit works properly.g. In this case. Notes ! Read the precautions for iPod in the following section. PIONEER. 3 Song number indicator Up to 65 535 can be displayed as the song number. if you keep touching o or p for five seconds.g. 4 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to Songs or Albums. disconnect the headphones from the iPod. the icon m or n is highlighted. While connected to this unit. # Depending on the model of iPod or the data size in the iPod. refer to Error messages on page 89. # You can also skip back or forward to another song/video by pressing c or d (TRACK). touch f. ! If an error message or icon is displayed. use touch panel keys to select the iPod. No xxxx will be displayed (e. When video is playing.Section 12 Using iPod Basic Operations 12 3 4 # Touch Hide to hide the touch panel keys. ! While the iPod is connected to this unit.

it is not possible to display the video on the PAL monitor. ! To pause video playback. ! This unit can display the album art. When browsing for a song ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Playlists (playlists) Artists (artists) Albums (albums) Songs (songs) Podcasts (podcasts) Genres (genres) Composers (composers) Audiobooks (audiobooks) Video Playlists (video playlists) Movies (movies) Music Videos (music videos) Video Podcasts (video podcasts) TV Shows (TV shows) Playing video This unit can play video if an iPod with video capabilities is connected.Section Using iPod ! If the characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this unit. Repeat this operation until you find the desired song/video. functions may not work properly. “Video Podcast” and “TV show” which are downloaded from iTunes store. ! Change the video setting on the iPod so that the iPod can output the video to an external device. ! If the characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this unit. — When the control mode is set to this unit. it is possible to change the signal between PAL and NTSC from iPod. # To return to the music operation screen. — For about control mode. “Music videos”. While loading the album art information from iPod. — When the control mode is set to iPod. 2 Touch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song/video. those characters are not displayed. — Time display and actual time may not match. 1 2 Touch MENU to display iPod menus. 3 Play video on the iPod. En 43 . — List operation may not function promptly. refer to the iPod’s manuals. If many songs and album art have been stored in iPod. ! For details. before you display the video screen. Using iPod When browsing for a video 3 Touch a list title that you want to play. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . those characters are not displayed. Searching songs/videos by category 1 Touch MENU to display iPod menus. ! iPod video image is not displayed on the PAL rear monitor. 4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # To return to the previous menu. touch Back. loading may take long time. Touch Video. touch Music. ! This unit can play back “Movies”. 12 Browsing for a song/video Operations to control an iPod with this unit is designed to be as close to the iPod as possible to make operation and song/video search easy. touch MENU. see the following section. Refer to Operating this unit’s iPod function from your iPod on page 45.

# If the characters recorded on the iPod are not compatible with this unit.. (Refer to Searching songs/videos by category on the previous page. Alphabet search mode is displayed. you can select other songs/videos while browsing. – Repeat just the current song/video – Repeat all songs/videos in the selected list Pausing a song % Touch f during playback. Repeating play For playback of the songs/videos on the iPod. In this condition. touch Cancel. # To return to the previous menu. Off (off)—ASR1—ASR2 # ASR2 is more effective than ASR1. you cannot select the other songs/videos. However.g. touch panel key operation is not available. those characters are not displayed. 5 Touch a list title that you want to play. touch Back. the volume will become slightly lower. 3 Touch c or d to select the first letter you are looking for. Repeat this operation until you find the desired song/video. to select the repeat range. % Touch ! ! Displaying text information on iPod Video % Touch INFO. Song Title (song title)—Artist Name (artist name)—Album Title (album title) # If specific information is not recorded on the iPod. The volume will become much lower for ASR2 than it will for ASR1. No xxxx will be displayed (e. touch ABC to switch to alphabet search mode. # You can start playback throughout the selected list by touching . ! While repeat play range is set to .Section 12 Using iPod Searching by alphabet in the list 1 Select a category. because the volume will suddenly seem much louder. No Name). While searching. Take care when you increase the volume for ASR2 and then switch to Off.) 2 When a list for the selected category is displayed. touch f again. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. 4 Touch to show entries starting with the letter you chose. Using advanced sound retriever Advanced sound retriever function automatically enhances compressed audio and restores rich sound. 44 En . (repeat there are two repeat play ranges: one song/video) and (repeat all songs/videos in the list). Note When you use this unit with a multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) and switch the advanced sound retriever function to ASR1 or ASR2. % Touch ASR repeatedly to select the desired setting. Searching flashes. # To refine the search with a different letter.

— Album list of currently playing artist — Song list of currently playing album — Album list of currently playing genre ! Depending on the number of files in the iPod. to turn shuffle all on. Not Found is displayed. Link play selection screen is displayed.. ! Genres – Plays songs related to the currently playing genre. operate the iPod. Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) This method plays all songs on the iPod randomly. touch edly until the shuffle icon is turned off. Using iPod Operating this unit’s iPod function from your iPod This unit’s iPod function can be operated from your iPod. to switch the control mode While searching the song. 1 Touch Link Play. En 45 . track up/ down. ! Albums – Play back songs/videos from a randomly selected album in order. # If the related albums/songs are not found. ! Songs – Play back songs/videos in the selected list in random order. chapter up/down. the iPod will not be turned off. To turn off power. In this condition.Section Using iPod Playing songs/videos in a random order (shuffle) For playback of songs/videos on the iPod. ! Artists – Plays songs related to the currently playing artist. Selecting songs from lists related to the currently playing song Lists related to the currently playing song are displayed. # Touching switches the control mode to this unit. Also. # Even if this function is performed. and operation can be conducted from your iPod.. You can select songs from the following lists. % Touch method. there are two random play methods: Songs (play back songs/videos in a random order) and Albums (play back albums in a random order). there may be a delay when displaying a list. Sound can be heard from the car’s speakers. playback speed can be changed. to select the random play play/pause can be operated from this unit. 12 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a song/video and play. flashes. fast forward/reverse and Changing audiobook speed While listening to an audiobook on iPod. 1 Touch to iPod. it is possible to display the text information while playing back video. ! While this function is in use. Link Play. touch panel key operation is not available. 3 Display returns to the ordinary display and playback begin. 2 Touch a desired mode. even if the ignition key is turned off. repeat# To cancel the random play. % Touch All songs on the iPod play randomly. ! Albums – Plays songs related to the currently playing album.

you can select the display mode between widescreen (16:9) and standard (4:3) screen. # To switch to standard (4:3) screen.Section 12 Using iPod % Touch Audiobooks to select your favorite setting. 46 En . % Touch Wide Screen. touch Wide Screen again. ! Faster – Playback faster than normal speed ! Normal – Playback in normal speed ! Slower – Playback slower than normal speed Changing the screen mode While video is playing.

2 Touch c or d on EQ Select to select the equalizer. 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Audio Menu to display the audio function names. # FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. you can only switch to Fader/Balance.Section Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. # When selecting Bluetooth telephone as the source. Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. 1 Touch Parametric EQ on the audio function menu. You can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each currently selected curve band (Low/Mid/High). Level (dB) Q=2N Center frequency Frequency (Hz) Q=2W 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. you cannot switch to Source Level Adjuster. 3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. # When selecting FM as the source. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 54. you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. ! The actual range of the adjustments are different depending on which equalizer curve is selected. Display Powerful Natural Vocal Equalizer curve Powerful Natural Vocal Using balance adjustment You can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. touch Back. # When the rear output setting is Subwoofer. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car’s interior acoustic characteristics as desired. 13 Audio Adjustments 1 Audio display Shows the audio adjustment status. refer to Introduction of DSP adjustments on page 76. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. 1 Touch Fader/Balance on the audio function menu. En 47 . the audio function will be changed to the multi-channel processor’s audio menu. # To return to the previous display. For details.

+6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. touch c. Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the selected range are outputted from the subwoofer. # When Flat is selected. Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high) 48 En . 1 Touch Subwoofer on the audio function menu. # To turn subwoofer output off. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low. the equalizer curve setting is memorized in Custom. Touch d to select normal phase and Normal appears in the display. no supplement or correction is made to the sound. 3 Touch c or d to select a desired level. you can adjust the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer.15kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12. 2 Touch d next to Sub Woofer to turn subwoofer output on.Factor to select the Q factor. touch c.5kHz 5 Touch c or d on Q. 5 Touch c or d next to Frequency to select cut-off frequency. 3 Touch c or d on Band to select the equalizer band to adjust. 1 Touch Bass Booster on the audio function menu. 1 Touch Loudness on the audio function menu. # Custom is an adjusted equalizer curve that you create. Touch d to turn loudness on. 4 Touch c or d next to Level to adjust the output level of the subwoofer. 0 to +6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Boosting the bass Bass boost function boosts the bass level of sound. 2 # To turn loudness off. Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high) 4 Touch c or d on Frequency to select the frequency to adjust. +12 to –12 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. If you make adjustments to an equalizer curve.Section 13 Audio Adjustments Custom Flat Super Bass Custom Flat Super bass Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off. Low: 40Hz—80Hz—100Hz—160Hz Mid: 200Hz—500Hz—1kHz—2kHz High: 3. # You can then select another band and adjust the level. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve. ! When the subwoofer output is on.and high-sound ranges at low volume. 2 Touch c or d to select a desired level. Touch c to select reverse phase and Reverse appears in the display. 2Wide—1Wide—1Narrow—2Narrow 6 Touch a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. 3 Touch c or d next to Phase to select the phase of subwoofer output.

3 Touch c or d to adjust the source volume. ! iPod and USB storage device are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. CD. Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off frequencies in the following order: 50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources. 13 Audio Adjustments 3 Touch c or d next to Frequency to select cut-off frequency. En 49 . touch c. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 1 Touch High Pass Filter on the audio function menu. 2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the audio function menu. Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. # To turn high pass filter off. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the source volume. 2 Touch d next to High Pass Filter to turn high pass filter on. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level. which remains unchanged. +4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased.Section Audio Adjustments Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers. ! Video CD. turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Notes ! The MW/LW volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments.

1 Touch Subtitle Language on the DVD setup menu. 2 Touch . the language specified on the disc is outputted. A subtitle language is set. # To cancel the inputted numbers. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD. subtitles are displayed in that language. The DVD setup function names are displayed. ! You can also switch the subtitle language by touching Subtitle during playback. 2 Touch the desired language. # To return to the previous display. touch Back. touch C. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 2 Touch Setup.) ! Even if you use Subtitle during playback to switch the subtitle language. Setting the subtitle language You can set a desired subtitle language. The audio language is set. 50 En . refer to When you select Others on this page. When you select Others When you select Others. 1 Touch Audio Language on the DVD setup menu.Section 14 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc. You can use this menu to change audio. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc. 1 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. Setup will be displayed instead of Menu. Please see the following section to input the four-digit code of the desired language. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) on page 26. # If you have selected Others. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 100. refer to When you select Others on this page. Setting the audio language You can set the preferred audio language. An audio language menu is displayed. 2 Touch the desired language. a language code input display is shown. 3 Touch ESC to return to the playback display. parental lock and other DVD settings. subtitle. the language specified on the disc is displayed. 1 Touch 0 to 9 to input the language code. # If you have selected Others. this does not affect the settings here. 1 Touch g.

select either Letter Box or Pan Scan. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 25. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc. ! When using a regular display. ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. ! 16:9 – Wide screen picture (16:9) is displayed as it is (initial setting) ! Letter Box – The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! Pan Scan – The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify Pan Scan. Setting up the DVD player Setting the menu language You can set the preferred language for displays of menus recorded on a disc. 2 Touch the desired language. the unit’s display changes to the same setting. refer to the disc’s instructions. Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture.) ! Even if you use Audio during playback to switch the audio language. 14 of 4:3. the language specified on the disc is displayed. % Touch Multi Angle on the DVD setup menu to turn angle icon display on. The menu language is set.Section Setting up the DVD player ! You can also switch the audio language by touching Audio during playback. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to V OUT. Touch TV Aspect repeatedly until the desired TV aspect appears in the display. refer to When you select Others on the previous page. A menu language menu is displayed. In this setting. # To turn the angle icon display off. touch Multi Angle again. this function is set to on. 1 Touch Menu Language on the DVD setup menu. ! Initially. while a regular display has a TV aspect En 51 . For details. Setting the slide show interval Slide show is possible when JPEG files are playing with this unit. Touch Slide Show repeatedly until the desired setting appears in the display. ! 10sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of 10 seconds ! 20sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of 20 seconds ! 30sec – JPEG images switch at intervals of 30 seconds Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display. interval of slide show can be set. # If you have selected Others. Setting the angle icon display You can set it up so that the angle icon appears on scenes where the angle can be switched. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. playback is with Letter Box even if you select Pan Scan setting. A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9. % Touch Slide Show on the DVD setup menu to select the slide show interval. this does not affect the settings here. ! If you select the TV aspect. % Touch TV Aspect on the DVD setup menu to select the TV aspect.

! 8 – Playback of the entire disc is possible (initial setting) ! 7 to 2 – Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! 1 – Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! We recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. # To cancel the inputted numbers. # If you forget your code number. You can set the parental lock to your desired level. Look for the level indication written at the disc package. refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number. and you can now set the level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock. letting you register a new one. 1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu. This enters the code number. 3 Touch . The playback of those scenes will be skipped. In this case. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the registered code number. Touch C and input the correct code number. For details. playback will begin when the correct code number is input. 3 Touch . refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level You can change the set parental lock level. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. touch C. % Touch DivX Subtitle on the DVD setup menu to select the desired subtitle setting. The new parental lock level is set. The code number is set. the parental lock may be active only on the scenes with certain levels. included literature or on the disc itself. ! Original – Display the DivX subtitles 52 En . 4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level.Section 14 Setting up the DVD player ! Manual – JPEG images can be switched manually a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult-oriented scenes. ! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when Custom is selected if no DivX external subtitle files exist. Parental lock of this unit is not possible if 4 Touch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. and you can now change the level. Refer to Changing the level on this page. If you forget your code number Please see the following section. The registered code number is canceled. and touch C 10 times. code number input indications may be displayed. ! With some discs. # If you input an incorrect code number. the icon is displayed. Setting the DivX subtitle file You can select whether to display DivX external subtitles or not. The parental lock level is set. Setting the code number and level You need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parental lock. 1 Touch Parental on the DVD setup menu.

You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code. If more than 126 characters are set. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider. ! Stream – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is output as it is (initial setting) ! Linear PCM – The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is converted to and output as a linear PCM signal Setting up the DVD player Displaying your DivX® VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit. If this unit’s digital output is not used. Normally. Your 8-digit registration code is displayed. which you submit to your provider. the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. 14 % Touch Digital Output on the DVD setup menu to select the desired digital output setting. If more than 42 characters are set. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. Setting for digital output Audio which is outputted from digital output of this unit can be selected. you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider. there is no need to change settings.Section Setting up the DVD player ! Custom – Display the DivX external subtitles Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. (Refer to Selecting audio output on page 27. the excess characters will not be displayed.) — Dual mono mode DVD video discs — Bilingual DVD-VR discs En 53 . ! Selecting Linear PCM enables you to switch the output channel if playing the following type of discs. % Touch DivX VOD on the DVD setup menu. set to Stream.

# To return to the previous display. Using the initial settings. you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp. refer to Using the AUX source on page 63. touch AUX2 again. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Off to turn this unit off. ! When the multi-channel processor (DEQP6600) is connected to this unit. When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when Full is selected). you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal performance from this unit. Initially. 1 Touch Rear Speaker on the initial menu. Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliary devices connected to this unit can be activated individually. CDV150M) ! Audio – auxiliary device connected with stereo mini plug cable ! iPod – an iPod with video capabilities connected with CD-IU200V ! Off – No auxiliary device is connected 1 1 Function display Shows the function names. If you switch the rear output setting to Subwoofer. you cannot operate this function. you can connect other full range speakers (Rear) or a subwoofer (Subwoofer) to the RCA rear output. the unit is set for rear full-range speaker connection (Full). # To turn auxiliary 2 setting off. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. ! Video – auxiliary video device connected with 4-pole mini plug cable (e. 3 Touch AV Menu and then touch Initial Menu to display the function names. Switching the auxiliary 2 setting % Touch AUX2 on the initial menu to turn auxiliary 2 setting on.g. 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. Set each AUX source to ON when using.Section 15 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings Switching the auxiliary 1 setting % Touch AUX1 on the initial menu to select desired setting. 54 En . touch Back. For more information about connecting or using auxiliary devices. 4 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display.. Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit’s rear output (rear speaker leads output and RCA rear output) can be used for fullrange speaker (Full) or subwoofer (Subwoofer) connection.

Touching FM Step will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz. # To turn Auto PI Seek off. there is no output unless you turn the subwoofer output on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 48). subwoofer output in the audio menu will return to the factory settings. switch the ignition key off and on after you set this setting. text information may not be displayed properly. Notes ! Even if you change this setting.Section Initial Settings 2 Touch c or d next to Rear Speaker to switch the rear output setting. It may be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz when AF is on. select Subwoofer (subwoofer). ! Some characters may not be displayed properly. you cannot operate the following procedure. # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output. When AF or TA is on. English (English)—РУССКИЙ (Russian) Setting the FM tuning step Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek tuning is 50 kHz. this unit can also display them. — Function menus — System menu — DVD setup menu — Initial menu — On-screen display — Multi language setting for DivX ! If the embedded language and the selected language setting are not the same. the tuning step automatically changes to 100 kHz. Switching Auto PI Seek The unit can automatically search for a different station with the same programming. Touching c or d will switch between Subwoofer and Rear and that status will be displayed. # When the rear output setting is Subwoofer. artist name or comment is embedded in a European language or Russian. Touch c to select full-range speaker and Full appears in the display. touch Auto PI again. 15 lected FM tuning step will appear in the display. Touch Language until the desired setting appears in the display. even during preset recall. Initial Settings 3 Touch c or d next to Preout to switch the subwoofer output or rear output. ! If you change this setting. ! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. ! Language can be changed in the following menus. Touch d to select subwoofer and Subwoofer appears in the display. The se- En 55 . If text information such as title name. % Touch Auto PI on the initial menu to turn Auto PI Seek on. % Touch FM Step on the initial menu to select the FM tuning step. ! To complete this operation. select Full (full-range speaker). # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output. Selecting menu language Menu language can be selected from English or Russian. % Touch Language on the initial menu to select the desired language. ! The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during manual tuning.

are possible. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player. but you can change this in this function. you can operate this function. touch C.g.Section 15 Initial Settings Switching the sound muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenuated automatically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ATT is displayed and no audio adjustments. 1 Touch PIN Code Input on the initial menu. % Touch TEL on the initial menu to select the setting. Mute is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. Touching TV Signal switches TV signal settings in the following order: Auto—PAL—SECAM Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection To connect your cellular phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. The PIN code you entered is stored in this system. 3 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 digits). ! This function is initially set to Auto so that this unit automatically adjusts the TV signal setting. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is canceled. ! You can only operate this function when Bluetooth adapter (e. ! Only when a Pioneer TV tuner (e. ! About your country TV signal. ! With some Bluetooth audio players. Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner. you may be required to enter the Bluetooth audio player PIN code in advance to set this unit for a connection. PIN code input display appears. CD-BTB200) is connected to this unit. you can operate this function. ! Mute – Muting ! ATT –20dB – Attenuation (ATT –20dB has a stronger effect than ATT –10dB) ! ATT –10dB – Attenuation ! Off – Turn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is turned off. you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your country TV signal setting. ! The sound is attenuated. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. 56 En . try switching to Low. If high sound is crippled or distorted. except volume control. leave the setting at High to ensure quality sound. The default code is 0000. Setting an equalizer level high can cause distortion. touch . Touch TEL until the desired setting appears in the display. Normally. % Touch TV Signal on the initial menu to select an appropriate TV signal.g. # To cancel the inputted numbers. consult with your nearest Pioneer dealer. you need to enter PIN code on your phone to verify the connection. Correcting distorted sound You can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer curve settings. GEXP5700TVP) is connected to this unit.

Please see the following section for Auto TA and EQ operation. touch Cancel. Touch Reset.Section Initial Settings % Touch Digital ATT on the initial menu to switch the digital attenuator setting. 3 Touch Reset again to reset audio functions. Touch Digital ATT repeatedly until the desired setting appears in the display. # To cancel resetting the audio functions. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. you can operate this function. ! High – High quality sound ! Low – Minimize distortion sound 15 Initial Settings Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and autoequalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically adjusted for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. you can operate this function. En 57 . 1 2 Touch Audio Reset on the initial menu. and then creates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. Refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 84 Resetting the audio functions You can reset all audio functions except volume. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics.

Zoom (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally. enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture 58 En . ideal for a cinemasized picture (wide screen picture) where captions lie outside. giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal picture) without any omissions. 2 Touch ESC to return to the display of each source. The system function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch System Menu to display the system function names. 1 1 System menu display Shows the system function names. ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture). ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public viewing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author’s rights protected by the Copyright Law. touch Back. 1 2 Touch Wide Mode on the system menu. Touch the desired wide mode setting. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. Just (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends. ! The video image will appear coarser when viewed in Cinema or Zoom mode. # To return to the previous display. Full (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only. it may appear different. giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio. Normal (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is. Cinema (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between Full and Zoom in the vertical direction. Changing the wide screen mode You can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one.Section 16 System settings Introduction of system adjustments without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.

# Temperature can be adjusted from +3 to –3. ! Off – No video component connected ! Video – External video component (such as portable video player) ! EXT-Video – External video unit (such as Pioneer products available in the future) ! TV – TV tuner connected with RCA cable 3 Touch c or d to adjust the selected item.Section System settings Changing the picture adjustment You can adjust the Brightness (brightness). the display is automatically dimmed when the car’s headlights are turned on. Color (color) . ! Select Video to watch video of a connected component as AV source. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. touch NEXT or PREV. ! Select TV to watch TV pictures from a connected TV tuner as TV source. Contrast (contrast). Dimmer (dimmer). +24 to –24 En 59 . 4 Touch c or d to adjust the brightness. the brighter the screen becomes.Hue (hue). ! You cannot adjust Color. % Touch AV Input on the system menu to select the AV input setting. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the level of selected item. Touch Dimmer. 2 Touch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d it moves cursor towards the left or the right. (Refer to Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) on the next page. ! ! ! ! 16 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Hue. The adjustment function names are displayed. 1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the system menu. 2 3 Touch NEXT. Adjusting the dimmer System settings To prevent the display from being too bright at night. You can turn the dimmer on or off. picture adjustment may not be possible. # With some rear view cameras.) # If color system is set to PAL/PAL-M/SECAM. resulting in a better white balance ! Black Level – Emphasizes dark portion on images so that the difference between brightness and darkness becomes more distinct ! Rear View/Source – Switch the picture adjustment modes # You cannot adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera when Camera Polarity is set to Off. 1 Touch Picture Adjustment on the system menu. Contrast and Black Level for the audio source. To switch between groups of touch panel keys. The adjustment function names are displayed. # Black Level can be set on or off. The farther the cursor moves to the right. Temperature (temperature) and Black Level (black level) for each source and rear view camera. Brightness – Adjusts the black intensity Contrast – Adjusts the contrast Color – Adjusts the color saturation Hue – Adjusts the tone of color (red is emphasized or green is emphasized) ! Dimmer – Adjust the brightness of display ! Temperature – Adjusts the color temperature. ! Select EXT-Video to watch video of a connected video unit as EXT source. Setting the AV input You can switch the setting according to the connected component. you cannot adjust Hue.

3 Touch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set.. Notes ! You can match the clock to a time signal by touching Just.g. This unit features a function that automatically switches to the rear view camera video (V IN jack) when a rear view camera is installed on your vehicle. ! Even while driving.Section 16 System settings Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. When the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position. % Touch Camera Polarity on the system menu to select an appropriate setting. (e. the clock display appears on the display. rear view camera image can be displayed.) — If 30 to 59. 2 Touch On/Off to turn the clock display on. the minutes are rounded down. consult your dealer. touch Rear View source icon. 10:36 becomes 11:00. ! Battery – When the polarity of the connected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Ground – When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! Off – When a rear view camera is not connected to this unit Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images. otherwise screen image may appear reversed. 10:18 becomes 10:00. (e. press and hold MUTE. 1 Touch Clock Adjustment on the system menu. For details. move the gear shift in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display. 4 Touch a or b to put a clock right.. touch On/Off again. the minutes are rounded up. To do this. ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward.) ! Even when the sources are off. In this case. # To turn the clock display off. refer to Selecting a source on page 11. switches to a rear view camera video. touch Rear View again to turn off the rear view camera. ! To end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display. — If 00 to 29. change the rear view camera setting. Each time you touch c or d it will select one segment of the clock display: Hour—Minute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted.) ! After you set up the rear view camera setting. the video automatically 60 En .g. (For more details.

When this is done. 2 Touch one of the color list. see the following section.) # If no JPEG image has been stored in this unit. you can select the displayed color as the background. Direct selection from preset illumination color You can select an illumination color from the color list. touching Scan can stop the scanning. # To return to the previous display. Selecting the background display You can switch background displays while listening to each source. 1 Touch Illumination Color on the entertainment menu. you cannot select Photo. AV Input cannot be selected. 17 Entertainment settings 1 1 Entertainment menu display Shows the entertainment function names. touch Back. The entertainment function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. Refer to Capture an image in JPEG files on page 38. To store JPEG image in this unit. ! While scanning all colors.Section Entertainment settings Introduction of entertainment settings ! AV Input – Video image from the external video unit that is connected to this unit # When the AV (AV input) is not set to Video. 2 Touch ESC to return to the display of each source. 1 Touch Background on the entertainment menu. ! ! ! ! ! ! Blue (blue) Red (red) Amber (amber) Green (green) White (white) Scan (scanning all colors) Notes ! Scan setting cycles continuously through all the colors. 2 Touch the desired setting. You can select one from the following list. You can select one from the following list. En 61 . ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! BGP1 – Background picture 1 BGP2 – Background picture 2 BGP3 – Background picture 3 BGP4 – Background picture 4 BGV1 – Background visual 1 BGV2 – Background visual 2 BGV3 – Background visual 3 Photo – JPEG image stored in this unit Customizing the illumination color 1 Touch Illumination Color on the entertainment menu. Selecting the illumination color This unit is equipped with multiple-color illumination. (Refer to page 59. 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Entertainment Menu to display the entertainment function names.

You can select one from the following list. 3 Press +/– (VOLUME) to customize the color.Section 17 Entertainment settings 2 Touch Custom to display the customizing menu. Memo2 or Memo3) until the beep sounds. 4 To store the customized color in memory. 1 Touch Screen Color on the entertainment menu. the color is recalled from memory. The customized color has been stored in memory. Selecting the OSD color You can change the OSD color. 2 Touch one of the color list. touch and hold one of preset keys (Memo1. The next time you touch the same preset key. ! ! ! ! ! Blue (blue) Red (red) Amber (amber) Green (green) White (white) 62 En .

audio and video may not be correctly reproduced. press and hold MUTE. 18 6 Gently touch the center of the + mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. Otherwise the screen is damaged. you can display it by touching the screen. The adjusted position data is saved. After you touch all the marks.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (e. CD-V150M). ! If touch panel adjustment cannot be performed properly. Otherwise. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch Off to turn this unit off. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen.. # To cancel the adjustment. and gently touch the screen. 2 Press and hold h (eject). En 63 . # Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. 7 Press and hold MUTE to complete the adjustment. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for adjustment. Mini pin plug cable (AUX-1) When connecting auxiliary device using a mini plug cable iPod and portable audio/video player can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. About AUX connection method You have two methods to connect auxiliary device to this unit. in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. Other Functions Using the AUX source A separately sold auxiliary device such as VCR or portable device can be connected to this unit. 5 Press DISP OFF to proceed to the 16point adjustment. If you press the touch panel forcefully. The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data. auxiliary device is automatically recognized as AUX source and assigned to AUX. reverse connection between red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is required. consult your local Pioneer dealer. and 16-point adjustment. depending on the cable. press and hold MUTE. in which you touch four corners of the screen. 4 Press DISP OFF to complete the 4-point adjustment.g. ! If an iPod with video capabilities is connected to this unit via 3. # When the source icon is not displayed. the adjusted position data is saved. adjust the response positions of the touch panel. you can enjoy the video contents of the iPod. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point adjustment.5 mm plug (4 pole) to RCA cable. 3 Touch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. ! It is possible to connect a portable audio/ video player by using a 3. # To cancel the adjustment.Section Other Functions Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (Touch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch. When connected. However. which is sold separately. the touch panel may be damaged.

although incompatible as a source. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source. 64 En . refer to the installation manual.. such as those with accents (e. When two external units are connected.g. 5 Touch OK to store the entered title in memory. á. refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector owner’s manual. Selecting AUX as the source % Touch the source icon and then touch AUX-1/AUX-2 to select AUX as the source. Basic operations of the external unit are explained below. 4 Touch c or d to move the cursor. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. à. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector (AUX-2) When connecting auxiliary device using an IPBUS-RCA Interconnector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB10/CD-RB20 (sold separately) to connect this unit to auxiliary device featuring RCA output. Allocated functions are different depending on the connected external unit. ä. # You can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123. Two external units can be controlled with this unit. refer to external unit’s owner’s manual. 6 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. # You can only make this type of connection if the auxiliary device has RCA outputs. the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. touch AV Menu and Function Menu and then touch Name Edit. For more details. refer to the connected external unit’s owner’s manual. % Touch Band. For more details. AUX cannot be selected. For details concerning functions. Using the external unit External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that. Touch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character types: Alphabet (upper case)—Alphabet (lower case) —European letters. ! Each title can be up to 10 characters long. Selecting the external unit as the source % Touch the source icon and then touch EXT-1/EXT-2 to select external unit as the source. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed. For details concerning functions. refer to Switching the auxiliary setting on page 54. enables control of basic functions with this unit. # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on. ç) Basic operation Functions allocated to the following operations are different depending on the connected external unit. 3 Touch a or b to select a letter of the alphabet. For more details. 2 Touch ABC to select the desired character type. you can display them by touching the screen.Section 18 Other Functions % Insert the stereo mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit.

! ! ! ! ! Function1 (function 1) Function2 (function 2) Function3 (function 3) Function4 (function 4) Auto/Manual (auto/manual) 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. Touch any of 1 to 6 to select a function. En 65 . % Touch a or b.Section Other Functions % Keep touching Band. 18 Using the functions allocated to 1 to 6 keys 1 2 Touch NEXT. # To return to the previous display. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. % Keep touching c or d. touch Back. Other Functions Advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. % Touch c or d.

Section 19 Available accessories Bluetooth Audio Basic Operations 1 2 3 lular phone may cause noise on the song playback. song index.g. ! While you are listening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player. # For this unit to control your Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless connection. ! When you are talking on a cellular phone connected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit vary extensively. CDBTB200) to this unit.) cannot be displayed on this unit. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on the next page. refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected.g. ! Even if you are listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio player and you switch to another source.g. song playback continues. If you use your cellular phone. the signal from your cel- For details concerning operation. ! If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e. ! Information about songs (e. selecting songs. 2 Connection indicator Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection status. — AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): Playing back. you can control Bluetooth audio players via Bluetooth wireless technology. ! In some countries. song playback from your Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. refrain from using on your cellular phone as much as possible. the operations available with this unit are limited to the following two levels: — A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch BT-Audio to select the Bluetooth audio source. are possible. CD-BTB200) to this unit.. CD-BTB200 is not sold on the market. To control your audio player using this unit. ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market. connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect the Bluetooth adapter (e. This section provides brief information on Bluetooth audio player operations with this unit. pausing. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adapter). song title. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module.) 66 En . the elapsed playing time. which slightly differs or is abbreviated from that described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. etc. etc.

Available accessories Pausing playback % Touch e during playback. touch Back. touch g. Various information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player % Touch Disconnect on the function menu. keep touching o or p. Connection Waiting is displayed. # You can also perform fast reverse/fast forward by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). After the disconnection is completed. touch d. ! ! ! ! Device Name (device name of this system) BD Address (address of Bluetooth device) System Version (system version) BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth module) Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. # To return to the previous display. 3 To skip back or forward to another track. 19 # You can also skip back or forward to another track by pressing c or d (TRACK). Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) information % Touch Device Information on the function menu to display the BD address. If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection. 5 To stop playback. En 67 . Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 56. No Connection is displayed. 4 To perform fast forward or reverse. briefly touch o or p. # To resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on. Connecting a Bluetooth audio player % Touch Connection Open on the function menu to turn the connection open on. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted.Section Available accessories 2 Touch d. Playback starts. 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. look for the code on the player or in its accompanying documentation. connection to this unit is automatically established.

refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ from the actual battery strength. refer to Voice recognition on the next page). refer to Setting automatic answering on page 74). ! Depending on the cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology. 7 Telephone indicator Shows when a phone connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is established (for more details. wireless calls. Important ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology. When you need to use these advanced operations. stop your vehicle in a safe place. 8 Battery strength indicator Shows the battery strength of cellular phone. 5 Voice recognition indicator Shows when the voice recognition function is on (for more details. is displayed. ! If your cellular phone is out of service.. ! If the battery strength is not available. nothing is displayed in the battery strength indicator area. ! Advanced operations that require your attention such as dialing numbers on the monitor. radio field intensity is not available. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. telephone indicator is flashing. ! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit.g. the signal level indicator does not appear. ! In some countries. ! This unit is not compatible with registration for guest phone. 4 Automatic answering/Automatic rejecting indicator Shows when the automatic answering function is on (for more details. In this case.Section 19 Available accessories Bluetooth Telephone Basic Operations 1 2 3 4 5 6 Shows when the automatic rejecting function is on (for more details. This section provides brief information on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differs or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation manual. etc. using this unit without running the engine can result in battery drainage. 9 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been received and not checked yet. CDBTB200). using phone book. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ form the actual signal level. even while driving. refer to Connecting a cellular phone on page 70). CD-BTB200 is not sold on the market. are prohibited while you are driving. you can connect a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology to this unit for hands-free. 98 7 ! If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e. 68 En . refer to Setting automatic rejecting on page 74). 6 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. 2 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellular phone. ! While connecting automatically. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. For details concerning operation.

touch again. hands-free phoning may not be performed. Refer to Using the equalizer on page 47. touch . To end the call. . # Before disconnecting the cellular phone from this unit. to make best use of the technology. 19 Making a phone call Voice recognition 1 Touch to turn the voice recognition function on. Voice recognition function is now ready. Taking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in. you can operate the equalizer function even when selecting the phone source. touch . you cannot perform the operation in the following section. touching switches between callers. En 69 . # Your phone should now be temporarily connected. Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in. # To cancel the voice recognition function. we recommend you register the phone to this unit. If the volume is muted (zero level) on your cellular phone. both you and your caller need to hang up the phone. the volume level of your cellular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller’s voice volume is big. When the multi-channel processor is connected to this unit. make sure to adjust the volume to a # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRACK). # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRACK). # You can also perform the same operation by pressing c (TRACK). However. # You can also perform the same operation by pressing c (TRACK). proper level. # While your callers hold the line. Available accessories 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. % Touch the source icon and then touch TEL to select the telephone. Answering a call waiting 1 Touch to answer a call waiting. Note The equalizer curve for the phone source is fixed. Setting up for hands-free phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. When adjusted. the volume level is recorded in this unit as the default setting. touch The call is rejected. Refer to Recalling equalizer curves on page 83. 2 To end the call. 1 Connection For detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. 3 Volume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. # If private mode is selected on the cellular phone. 2 Touch to end all calls. Voice dial icon appears on the information bar. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone. refer to Registering a connected cellular phone on the next page. overall volume level may become unstable. registering your phone with this unit.Section Available accessories ! This unit does not have the name edit function of a Phone Book entry. # Caller’s voice volume and ring volume may vary depending on the type of cellular phone. When selecting the phone source. 2 Registration To register your temporarily connected phone. # The caller you have been talking to is now on hold. refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. and adjusting the volume level.

You can change this code in the initial setting. device name or Name Not Found (if names cannot be obtained) is displayed. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. # Up to five peripheral cellular phones are displayed. After disconnection is completed. Not Found is displayed. When available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology are found. No Connection is displayed. check the device name (Pioneer BT unit) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. To complete the connection. Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. touch Phone Name. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. To return to the device name. Connecting flashes. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 56. # To cancel this function. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. 3 Touch the device name you want to connect. # If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones. 2 Touch and hold one of the registration assignments to register the currently connected phone. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. Registering a connected cellular phone 1 Touch Phone Register on the function menu. 2 Touch ESC to return to the telephone standby display. While connecting. Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. Refer 70 En . touch Back. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 56. 2 Touch Search to search for available cellular phones. Connection Waiting flashes and the unit is now on standby for connection from a cellular phone. 2 Touch Disconnect to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. You can change this code in the initial setting. # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRACK). the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. While searching. 2 and 3 appear on the display. touch Connection Open again. # You can display the BD address by touching BD ADDR. Searching flashes. If the registration is succeeded.Section 19 Available accessories # You can also perform the same operation by pressing d (TRACK). # To return to the previous display. Rejecting call waiting % Touch to reject a call waiting. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. 2 Touch Connection Open. Registration assignments for user phone 1.

referring to Connecting to a registered cellular phone on this page. the device name is not displayed. touch Phone Book Name View again. Connecting is flashing. A confirmation display appears. Touch OK to delete the phone. 2 Touch Direct Connect. first delete the current assignment. return to step 1 and try again. If your cellular phone is ready for Bluetooth wireless connection. Inverted is displayed and the name view order is changed. While connecting. 3 Use the cellular phone to perform phone book transfer. # To cancel deleting a registered phone. Connecting to a registered phone automatically % Touch Auto Connect on the function menu to turn the Automatic Connection function on. 2 Touch Start to turn the Phone Book Transfer function on. 2 Touch Delete next to the device name you want to delete. touch ESC. The Phone Book Transfer is now on standby. Calling a number in the phone book Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. In this case. 1 Touch Phone Book Transfer on the function menu. 4 When you are done transferring Phone Book entries. Changing the phone book display order % Touch Phone Book Name View on the function menu to change the name view order. 3 Touch the device name you want to connect. 300 from User 1. connection to this unit is automatically established. En 71 . # To turn automatic connection off. For more detailed instructions. # If the registration failed. and 50 from User 3. If the assignment is already taken. 150 from User 2. the connection to your cellular phone is off. For detailed instructions. # If connection fails. Note When the phone book transfer is complete. connect to your cellular phone once again. touch Auto Connect again. the device name appears.Section Available accessories # If the assignment is empty. To use the Phone Book. # To change to the original order (Original). # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. see Deleting a registered phone on this page. touch Cancel. Available accessories Connecting to a registered cellular phone Connecting to a registered phone manually 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu. Deleting a registered phone 1 Touch Phone Register on the function menu. 19 Using the phone book Transferring entries to the phone book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 entries. # To cancel the transferring process. refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. To replace an assignment with a new phone. touch Stop. Perform phone book transfer using the cellular phone. device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. Connection Error is displayed.

2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. 6 Touch to make a call. “Brian” and “Burt” when “B” is selected). 4 Touch a Phone Book entry you want to call. Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. Clearing a phone book entry Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. 1 Touch to display the Phone Book. Each phone number can be up to 24 digits long. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 3 Touch Edit next to the phone number you want to edit. # If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entry that you have selected. The display shows the first six Phone Book entries starting with that letter (e. Touch Yes to delete the entry. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on the previous page. received and missed.g. 1 Touch Log to display the Call History. Using the call history Editing phone numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. 1 Touch to display the Phone Book. If several phone numbers are entered to an entry. # If no phone numbers have been stored in the selected list. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. touch No. touch Clear. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entry you selected is displayed on the information bar. You can edit the numbers of Phone Book entries. 3 Touch Delete to delete the Phone Book entry. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on the previous page. nothing is displayed. # For an international call. 2 Touch c or d to select the first letter of the name you are looking for. 72 En . 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. Touch and hold Clear to delete all the input numbers. # Touch Clear to delete the number. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. 5 Touch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. touch . 4 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers. “Ben”. # For an international call. touch one you want to call. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. A confirmation display appears.Section 19 1 Available accessories Touch to display the Phone Book. Touching Log repeatedly switches between the following call histories: Missed Calls (missed call)—Dialed Calls (dialed call)—Received Calls (received call) # You can switch between phone number and name (if entered) by touching ABC/123. # To refine the search with a different letter. You can browse the Call History and call numbers from it. The display is switched to the Phone Book detail display. 3 Touch Enter to show entries starting with the letter you chose. 7 To end the call. are stored in the Call History. 5 Touch OK to store the new number. The 6 most recent calls made (dialed).

Or directly enter a desired phone number. To end the call. 2 Touch List to display preset assignments.Section Available accessories 2 Touch a phone number or name (if entered) you want to call. To select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call History. You can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you entered is selected. 4 To end the call. # No Data is displayed for empty assignment. touch to make a call. Preset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). please see the following section. 1 Select a desired phone number from the phone book or the call history. Even if the assignment is taken. # For an international call. # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment. see the instructions explained in previous pages. 2 Touch Clear next to the item you want to delete from the memory. # For an international call. you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assignment. 3 Touch to make a call. 19 Recalling preset numbers 1 Touch List to display preset assignments. 3 When you completed entering the number. touch Making a call by entering phone number Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. # Touch Clear to delete the number. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar. Refer to Making a call by entering phone number on this page. . 2 Touch one of preset assignments. The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar. Using preset numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the parking brake when performing this operation. touch . Select from the following: ! ! ! ! Phone Book (phone book) Dialed Calls (dialed call history) Received Calls (received call history) Missed Calls (missed call history) En 73 . 3 Keep touching one of preset assignments to store the phone number. Preset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). # Up to 24 digits can be entered. Available accessories Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be assigned to presets for quick recall. 4 To end the call. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar. Touch and hold Clear to delete all the input numbers. The phone number you selected is stored in presets. 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input numbers. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. touch . 3 4 Touch to make a call. 1 Touch Direct to display the direct dial display. Clearing memory 1 Touch Clear Memory on the function menu. touch Add “+” to add + to the phone number. touch Set here. To directly enter a desired phone number.

Setting automatic answering % Touch Auto Answer on the function menu to turn the automatic answer on. Displaying BD address of your cellular phone 1 Touch Phone Connect on the function menu.Section 19 Available accessories ! Dial Preset (preset phone numbers) ! System Version (version of this unit’s microprocessor) ! BT Module Version (version of Bluetooth module) After selecting a desired item. a confirmation display appears. 2 Touch BD Address to display the BD address. # To turn echo canceling off. Various information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. # To turn the ring tone off. touch Cancel. # To turn the automatic answer off. Touch OK to delete the memory. # To turn the automatic call rejection off. touch Ring Tone again. # To return to the device name. touch Echo Cancel again. Echo canceling and noise reduction % Touch Echo Cancel on the function menu to turn Echo Cancel function on. touch Clear All. Switching the ring tone % Touch Ring Tone on the function menu to turn the ring tone on. # If you want to clear all the Phone Book. touch Phone Name. # If you do not want to clear memory that you have selected. 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed. dialed/received/missed call history list and preset phone number. ! Device Name (device name of this system) ! BD Address (address of Bluetooth device) 74 En . Setting automatic rejecting % Touch Refuse All Calls to turn the automatic call rejection on. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address Displaying BD address of this system % Touch Device Information on the function menu to display the BD address. touch Refuse All Calls again. touch Auto Answer again.

keep touching c or d for about one second and release. Storing and recalling broadcast stations You can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall. 3 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. # To return to the previous display. Touch Band repeatedly until the desired band is displayed. refer to the TV tuner’s operation manual. For details concerning operation. GEX-P5700TVP). # When the source icon is not displayed. Available accessories 2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory.Section Available accessories TV tuner Basic Operations 1 2 3 4 5 To perform seek tuning. The tuner will scan the channels until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. 2 Touch ESC to return to the TV picture. 4 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. # You can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. 19 You can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e. 3 Touch Band to select a band. # You can also perform manual tuning by pressing c or d (TRACK). ! Six stations for each band can be stored in memory. which differs from that described in the TV tuner’s operation manual.g. The next time you touch the same preset tuning key the station is recalled from memory. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. 2 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. The function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 to P12 until the beep sounds. 2 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. briefly touch c or d. 1 Touch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV. 1 Touch List to display the preset list. # You can also perform seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d (TRACK). touch Back. which is sold separately. you can display it by touching the screen. # You can also use a and b to recall stations assigned to preset tuning keys P01 to P12. Introduction to advanced operations 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch Function Menu to display the function names. En 75 . This section provides information on TV operations with this unit. # When P01 to P06 and P07 to P12 are not displayed. 4 To perform manual tuning. TV1 or TV2. 1 Source icon Shows which source has been selected. The selected broadcast station has been stored in memory. you can display them by touching List.

1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished. # To cancel the storage process. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency. Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments 1 You can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600). Position. channel)— Country 4 (OIRT channel) 1 Touch AV Menu and then touch DSP Menu to display the DSP function names.Section 19 Available accessories Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially % Touch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. you can create a finely-tuned sound field effortlessly. # To go to the next group of function names. Also.K. By carrying out the following settings/adjustments in the order shown. you cannot use audio functions. 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and autoequalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Selecting the area group 1 Touch Country on the function menu. Auto EQ and Auto TA will be canceled. Country 1 (CCIR channel)—Country 2 (Italy channel)—Country 3 (U. BSSM stops flashing. touch BSSM again. Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may replace broadcast stations you have saved using P01 to P12. BSSM begins to flash. 2 Touch c or d to select the area group. # To return to the previous group of function names. touch a. which is sold separately. 76 En . touch b. Touch c or d until the desired area group appears in the display. equalizer curve setting. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted.

2 Touch a or b to adjust front/rear speaker balance. you cannot switch to Source Level Adjuster. to select a listening position as listed in the table. touch the same key again. # To return to the previous display. Key c d a b Display Front-L Front-R Front All Position Front seat left Front seat right Front seats All seats 3 Touch c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. c/d/a/b. Touch one of these. The position selector function lets you automatically adjust the speaker output levels and inserts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. # When selecting FM as the source. En 77 . putting you right in the center of the sound field. 1 Touch Fader/Balance on the DSP function menu. Left:25 to Right:25 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. # When playing other than the DVD disc. 1 Touch Position on the DSP function menu. Available accessories 2 Touch ESC to return to the ordinary display. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear. Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live performance. you cannot switch to Dolby Pro Logic II. # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting. You can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels. touch Back. you cannot switch to Time Alignment. Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image. the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a panoramic sound that envelops you. you cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control.Section Available accessories # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency. 19 Using balance adjustment You can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. # When neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position. the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. audio is outputted from front speakers only. Front:25 to Rear:25 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. Each time you touch c or d it moves the left/ right speaker balance towards the left or the right. When used in conjunction with the SFC. # FR: 0/LR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # To cancel the selected listening position. 2 Touch c/d/a/b to select a listening position. Note When you make adjustments to the listening position.

1-channel audio (i. Touch SFC until the desired setting appears in the display. floors and ceilings. Jazz. we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II off. The dynamic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. early reflections. 3 Touch c or d to adjust the source volume. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level. % Touch SFC on the DSP function menu to select the setting. which remains unchanged. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the source volume. walls. compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically.. On the other hand..e. Notes ! The MW/LW volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. Musical. Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference between the largest and softest sounds. +4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased.e. and late reflections. Drama or Action). Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitry to recreate the acoustics of various performance settings. we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. 2 Touch Source Level Adjuster on the DSP function menu. At a live performance you hear music in three stages: direct sound. ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. Musical—Drama—Action—Jazz—Hall— Club—Off Display Musical Drama Action Jazz Hall Club Off Setting Musical Drama Action Jazz Hall Club Off Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent radical changes in volume when switching between sources. CD. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. ! AUX (auxiliary input) and AV (AV input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically. when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i. ! When playing other than the DVD disc. you cannot switch to Dynamic Range Control. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. or reverberations. 78 En . Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5. Hall or Club). ! Video CD.Section 19 Available accessories ! The acoustics of different performance environments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage.

! Dimension (Dimension) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either towards the front or the rear. touch c. Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 2 Touch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. It improves the left-center-right stage presentation for both the driver and the front passenger. 1 Touch Digital Direct on the DSP function menu. Touch d to turn the direct control on. 1 Touch Down Mix on the DSP function menu. 19 1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II. Available accessories Touch c or d to select the desired level. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. Using the direct control You can override audio settings to check for effectiveness of your audio settings. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48 kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no effect on other types of source. # To turn dynamic range control off. ! When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME and Dolby Pro Logic II. 2 # To turn direct control off. ! Panorama (Panorama) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting “wraparound” effect. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: Panorama (panorama)—Dimension (dimension)—Center Width (center width) En 79 . 1 Touch Dolby Pro Logic II. ! Movie – The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! Music – The Music mode suitable for music playback ! Matrix – The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF – Turn Dolby Pro Logic II off ! Music Adjust – Adjust the Music mode # You can operate Music Adjust only when Music has been selected. ! Center Width Control (Center Width) allows center-channel sounds to be positioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers.Section Available accessories 1 Touch Dynamic Range Control on the DSP function menu. 2 Touch Music and then touch Music Adjust. 2 Touch d to turn the dynamic range control on. # You can operate Music Adjust only when Music has been selected. 2 ! Lo/Ro – Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as surround components. 3 Touch a or b to select Panorama (panorama). touch c. ! Lt/Rt – Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). you cannot switch to Dolby Pro Logic II. Adjusting the Music mode You can adjust the Music mode with the following three controls.

+3 to -3 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear. Otherwise select Small (small). when Front (front speakers) have been selected. 2 Touch a or b to select Subwoofer (subwoofer). 6 Touch b to select Center Width and then touch c or d to adjust the center image. this may indicate that the subwoofer’s output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. 7 places all center sound equally in the left/right speakers. 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. or if no subwoofer is installed. Touch c to select reverse phase and Reverse appears in the display. ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to Off. 1 Touch Speaker Setting. # You can select On or Off. try changing the phase setting for the subwoofer. Touch d to turn subwoofer output on. 3 Touch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker. The size needs to be set to Large (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: 4 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the phase of subwoofer output. 80 En . when Subwoofer (subwoofer) has been selected. # To turn the panorama control off. 5 Touch b to select Dimension and then touch c or d to adjust front/rear speaker balance.Section 19 Available accessories 4 Touch d to turn the panorama control on. Each time you touch c or d it moves the sound towards the front or the rear. 1 Touch Speaker Setting. Setting the speaker setting You need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/adjustments depending on the installed speakers. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front (front speakers)—Center (center speaker)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting) 3 # To turn subwoofer output off. To remove this problem. ! Set the front or rear speaker to Large if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content. 3 is the default and it’s recommended for most recordings. Touch d to select normal phase and Normal appears in the display. Front (front speakers)—Center (center speaker)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (subwoofer)—Phase (subwoofer setting) # You can switch to Phase only when the subwoofer has been set to On. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker. # You can switch Reverse (reverse phase) or Normal (normal phase). Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: Off (off)—Small (small)—Large (large) # You cannot select Off. touch c. touch c. when Phase (subwoofer setting) has been selected. Correcting the subwoofer’s phase If trying to boost the bass output of the subwoofer doesn’t do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky. Each time you touch c or d it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers over a range 0 to 7. ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to Off and the front and rear speakers set to Small or Off.

use test tone to adjust the approximate speaker level. 1 Touch Cross Over. there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is Small or Large and no center speaker is installed. Note To adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at Test Tone. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the equalizer level. under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoofer. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is Small or Large. First. Each time you touch c or d selects cross-over frequencies in the following order: 63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz—160Hz— 200Hz Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a crossover frequency of the subwoofer’s L. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the overall balance right among the speakers. Adjusting the speaker output levels Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listening to an audio output.F. pass filter). 1 Touch Test Tone.Section Available accessories Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Dolby Pro Logic II turned on.P (high. If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to Small. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front (front speakers)—Center (center speaker)—Rear (rear speakers)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) 3 Touch c or d to select cross-over frequency.P (low-pass . Both provide the same results. 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted.) 3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker output level.F. 1 Touch Speaker Level. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on the previous page. you can select a frequency. under which sounds are reproduced through a Large speaker or subwoofer. Available accessories 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)— Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) # You cannot select speakers whose size is set to Off. filter) and that of the Small speaker H. En 81 . and then use this function to adjust finely. +10 to –10 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 19 Selecting a cross-over frequency You can select a frequency. The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to Off and other speakers are set to Large or Off.

Adjusting the time alignment You can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in Custom. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 80. Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)— Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level.) 2 Touch any of the following touch panel keys to select the time alignment. Each time you touch a or b selects the speaker in the following order: Front-L (front speaker left)—Center (center speaker)—Front-R (front speaker right)— Rear-R (rear speaker right)—Rear-L (rear speaker left)—Subwoofer (subwoofer) # You cannot select speakers whose size is set to Off. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 80. 1 Touch Time Alignment and then touch TA Adjust.) Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the distance between each speaker and the listening position. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at intervals of about two seconds. Notes ! If needed. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page. perform step 4 to stop the test tone. 1 Touch Time Alignment. select speakers and adjust their ‘absolute’ output levels. ! Initial – Initial time alignment (factory setting) ! Auto TA – Time alignment created by auto TA and EQ.) ! Custom – Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! Off – Turn the time alignment off ! TA Adjust – Adjust the time alignment as desired # You cannot select Auto TA if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set to Off.) ! To adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at Speaker Level (speaker output level). Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the equalizer level. # You cannot select TA Adjust when neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position. Both provide the same results. (Refer to Auto TA and EQ (autotime alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 84. 82 En . If no adjustments are needed. 2 Touch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. The test tone is outputted.Section 19 Available accessories 2 Touch Start to start the test tone output. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display. # You cannot select TA Adjust when neither Front-L nor Front-R is selected in Position. 3 Touch c or d to adjust the speaker output level. +10 to –10 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 Touch Stop to stop the test tone output.

! A separate Custom1 curve can be created for each source. you can adjust the front. an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve. Touch d repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1 —Custom2—Super Bass 4 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. We recommend reproducing a 2ch. 2 Touch a or b to select the desired item. Touch c or d until the desired speaker appears in the display. Each time you touch c or d increases or decreases the distance. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)— Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency) —Level (equalizer level)—Q. 1 Touch Parametric EQ. and then reproducing a 5. Display Powerful Natural Vocal Flat Custom1 Custom2 Super Bass Equalizer curve Powerful Natural Vocal Flat Custom 1 Custom 2 Super bass ! Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves. no supplement or correction is made to the sound. rear and center equalizer curves separately by selecting a center frequency. Here is a list of the equalizer curves. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn’t easy. 2 Touch a or b to select the desired item. 3 Touch d to select the equalizer.0cm to 500. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and adjusting the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other speakers. Available accessories Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer curves which you can easily recall at any time. 0. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: Equalizer (equalizer)—SP-Select (speakers)— Band (bands)—Frequency (center frequency) —Level (equalizer level)—Q.1-ch. ! When Flat is selected. 1 Touch Parametric EQ. Factor (Q factor) En 83 . ! A Custom2 curve can be created common to all sources. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers except for the center.0cm is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car’s interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Touch d repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: Powerful—Natural—Vocal—Flat—Custom1 —Custom2—Super Bass 19 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer For Custom1 and Custom2 equalizer curves. Factor (Q factor) 3 Touch d to select the equalizer.Section Available accessories 3 Touch c or d to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the listening position.

40Hz—50Hz—63Hz—80Hz—100Hz—125Hz —160Hz—200Hz—250Hz—315Hz—400Hz —500Hz—630Hz—800Hz—1kHz—1.5kHz 7 Touch b and then touch c or d to adjust the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: Narrow (narrow)—Wide (wide) # You can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way. touch c.6kHz—2kHz—2. 8 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the desired Q factor.Section 19 Available accessories Rear (rear speakers)—Center (center speaker) —Front (front speakers) # You cannot select speakers whose size is set to Off.) Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer curve created by auto TA and EQ (refer to Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). 2 # To turn auto-equalizer off. but you cannot select frequencies that have intervals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. 5 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Touch c or d until the desired frequency appears in the display. When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output. (e. # You cannot use this function if auto TA and EQ has not been carried out. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly before carrying out auto TA and EQ. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer curve. +12 to –12 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased.15kHz—4kHz —5kHz—6.. 1 Touch Auto EQ. never carry out auto TA and EQ while driving. CAUTION ! Carrying out auto TA and EQ under the following conditions may damage the speakers. and then creates the auto-equalizer curve based on that information. a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 80. Each time you touch c or d it increases or decreases the equalizer level. Note You can select a center frequency for each band. — When speakers are incorrectly connected. You can change the center frequency in 1/3-octave steps. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics.) — When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker’s maximum input power capability. You can turn the auto-equalizer on or off. Touch d to turn the auto-equalizer on. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: Low (low)—Mid (mid)—High (high) 6 Touch b and then touch c or d to select the center frequency of selected band.5kHz—3.g. WARNING To prevent accidents. Auto TA and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically adjusted for the distance between each speaker and the listening position.3kHz—8kHz—10kHz—12. 84 En .25kHz —1.

! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control. windows and the sun roof. If desired. Before operating the auto TA and EQ function ! Carry out auto TA and EQ in as quiet a place as possible. so please continue to use this value. the setting will be replaced. center and rear speaker. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF. with the car engine and air conditioning switched off. engine noise may prevent correct auto TA and EQ. However. (Refer to page 77. the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circumstances. close all doors. The auto TA and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. auto TA and EQ cannot be carried out. ! Be sure to carry out auto TA and EQ using the supplied microphone. the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency. auto TA and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. resulting in a drain on battery power. telephones ringing etc. place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto TA and EQ. En 85 . (Refer to page 83. ! The time alignment value calculated by auto TA and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. engine sound. ! When front speaker is not connected. Sounds other than the measurement tone (surrounding sounds. 19 — When the reflected sound within a vehicle is strong and delays occur. ! If you carry out auto TA and EQ when a previous setting of this already exists. Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car. or remove them from the car before carrying out auto TA and EQ.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. — When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the center of the headrest of the driver’s seat. and then turn the engine off. Using another microphone may prevent measurement.Section Available accessories ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time. ! Auto TA and EQ changes the audio settings as below: — The fader/balance settings return to the center position.) — The equalizer curve switches to Flat. turn off the LPF on the power amp before carrying out auto TA and EQ. facing forward. If the engine is left running. using the belt (sold separately). Set the power amp’s input level to the standard position. or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. Available accessories Carrying out auto TA and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible.) — It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front. Be sure to place the microphone in the specified location. In addition.

turn it off. color change or malfunction. If the car’s air conditioner or heater is turned on. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers. 7 Touch AV Menu and then touch Initial Menu to display the function names.Section 19 Available accessories 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. auto TA and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. touch Stop. Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto TA and EQ. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible. refer to the multi-channel processor’s operation manual. touch Back or ESC.) 13 Touch ESC to cancel the auto TA and EQ mode. and auto TA and EQ begins. 6 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys. For details concerning operation. 5 Touch the source icon and then touch Off to turn this unit off. # If no position is selected before you start auto TA and EQ. 14 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. an error message is displayed. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period. Front-L is selected automatically. 11 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. high temperatures may cause distortion. # To stop auto TA and EQ. Complete is displayed. 86 En . (Refer to Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages on page 91. Refer to Using the position selector on page 77. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. # When all speakers are connected. 8 Touch Auto EQ&TA to enter the auto TA and EQ measurement mode. # To cancel auto TA and EQ on the way. 9 Plug the microphone into the microphone input jack on the multi-channel processor. 12 When auto TA and EQ is completed. # Press SRC/OFF to turn the source on if this unit is turned off. 10 Touch Start to start the auto TA and EQ.

Turn the attenuator off. The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing. There is audio and video skipping. The attenuator is on. Additional Information The unit is performing still. There is no sound.Appendix Additional Information Troubleshooting Common Symptom Power doesn’t turn on. Volume level is low. Adjust the volume level. This operation is not possible. start playback sible during playback. Cause Leads and connectors are incorrectly connected. Battery power is low. and op. Noise and other factors are causing Press RESET. The icon is displayed. Cables are not connected correctly. once more. Connect the cables correctly. When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC). Check by using another disc. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Connect a parking brake cord. The volume level is low. (Page 93) Check what type the disc is. Be very sure to install a fuse with the same rating. disc. Load new battery. Connect a parking brake cord. The parking brake is not applied. then replace the fuse. Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. (Page 51) This is a normal operation. The operation is not compatible with the disc’s organization. The volume level will not rise.There is no sound during still. slow motion or tion or frame-by-frame playback. The unit doesn’t operate. Secure the unit firmly. Switch to the correct remote control mode. Action (See) Confirm once more that all connections are correct. frame-by-frame playback. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. The unit does not operate correctly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. Operation with the remote control isn’t possible. the aspect is incorrect. No sounds are heard. En 87 . The unit is not firmly secured. the motor sounds. The remote control code is incorrect. Select the appropriate setting for your display. The picture is stretched. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Reading of data has become impos. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display. (Page 9) the built-in microprocessor to operate incorrectly. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. slow mo. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not connected. and apply the parking brake. This operation is not possible. Clean disc. Playback is not possible. and apply the parking brake. The disc is dirty.The operation is prohibited for the eration is not possible.After stopping playback once. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. The fuse is blown.

The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Switching to a selected language is not possible if the language selected in Setup is not recorded on the disc. Action This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. (Some discs may have ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copythis.) back. Switch between multiple angles when watching scenes recorded from multiple angles. Switch using the disc menu. Camera Polarity is at incorrect setting. The Video CD playing features PBC. (Page 7. Cause The Video CD playing does not feature PBC. A parental lock message is displayed and playback is not possible. (Page 60) Nothing is displayed. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Problems during DVD playback Symptom Playback is not possible. The touch panel keys cannot be used.Appendix Additional Information The rear view camera is not connected. when playdistorted and dark during play. Parental lock is on. (Page 52) Input the correct code number. No subtitles are displayed. ing. Action (See) Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. Page 105) Turn parental lock off or change the level. The code number is incorrect. Switch using the disc menu. Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. You have forgotten your code number. the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imperfections when viewed on some displays. The DVD playing does not feature Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language selected in Setup. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning.copying. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. You can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. Connect a rear view camera. Parental lock cannot be canceled. You can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. (Page 52) You cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. You are trying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. 88 En . Subtitles are not displayed if they are not recorded on the disc. Press and hold MUTE to return to the source display and then select the correct setting for Camera Polarity. You cannot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Cause The loaded disc has a different region number from this unit. (Page 52) Touch C 10 times to cancel the code number. settings selected in Setup.

Additional Information Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center. the disc with one this unit can play. Replace disc. Normally. Unplayable Disc This type of disc cannot be played by this unit The inserted disc does not contain any files that can be played back Protect Skipped Temp Rental Expired. connect the cable again.Appendix Additional Information Problems during iPod playback Symptom iPod doesn’t operate correctly. Action Disconnect the cable from iPod. The volume level will not rise. put. Built-in DVD player Message Different Region Disc Error-02-XX/FF-FF Cause Action The disc does not have the same re. Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Cause Cables are incorrectly connected. Replace disc. Cause Optical cables are not connected correctly.This unit cannot play DivX HD file. Action (See) Connect the cables correctly. Check that the disc is loaded correctly. (Page 53) Digital output setting is set to LineEven if multi-channel audio is selected.ar PCM. Replace disc. Reset the iPod. Dirty disc Scratched disc The disc is loaded upside down Electrical or mechanical Clean disc. 2-channel audio is out. File Not-Playable . The iPod version is old. Once iPod main menu is displayed.Replace the DVD video with one bearing the gion number as this unit correct region number. Problems during multi-channel processor connection Symptom No sounds are heard.High Definition All the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by DRM The temperature of this unit is outside the normal operating range The inserted disc that contains expired DivX VOD content. En 89 . Replace nition DivX file. Replace the disc with one this unit can play. The inserted disc contains high defi. Replace disc. set the digital output setting to Stream. Press RESET. be sure to have the error message recorded. Replace disc. Update the iPod version.

Perform one of the following operations. Check USB The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB short-circuited. Select the playable file. –Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memory. This unit’s DivX registration code has not been authorized by DivX VOD contents provider. this unit. –Change to a different source. Error-02-9X/-DX Communication failure 90 En . Follow the USB memory instructions to disable the security. It is not possible to write it in the flash. memory that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant. Protect N/A USB The USB device connected to is not Connect a USB portable audio player or USB supported by this unit. The connected USB portable audio player/USB memory consumes more than 500 mA (maximum allowable current). Skipped The connected USB portable audio Play an audio file not protected by Windows player/USB memory contains WMA Media DRM 9/10. Then. Authorization Error Register this unit to DivX VOD contents provider. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (Page 53) Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played by Select the playable file. USB device is not formatted with FAT16 or FAT32 USB device should be formatted with FAT16 or FAT32. Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memory and do not use it. No songs USB memory with security enabled is connected Transfer the audio files to the USB portable audio player/USB memory and connect. USB audio player/USB memory Message Unplayable File Cause Action This type of file cannot be played by Select the playable file. –Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON. cable is not caught in something or damaged. return to the USB portable audio player/USB memory. files that are protected by Windows Media™ DRM 9/10 All the files on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memory are protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 Transfer audio files not protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio player/USB memory and connect. then to ACC or ON and then connect the compliant USB portable audio player/USB memory.Appendix Additional Information This unit’s flash memory used for temporary storage area is full. this unit.

Reset the iPod. Please check Rear-R speaker. The microphone cannot pick up the Error. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible.. refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. After checking.. Once iPod main menu is displayed. Error. If an error message appears. Error.Appendix Additional Information iPod Message Error-02-6X/-9X/-DX Cause Communication failure Action Disconnect the cable from iPod. Error. ! Set the microphone correctly. Please check Rear-L speaker. air conditioner or heater. Disconnect the cable from iPod. iPod failure Error-02-67 No Songs Stop Old version of iPod No songs No songs in the current list Additional Information Understanding auto TA and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto TA and EQ. ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly. Please check Front measuring tone of a speaker. Please check Center speaker. connect the cable again.. Error.. Please check Front-R speaker. Update the iPod version. Please check noise. Cause Microphone is not connected. Action Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. and switch off the engine. En 91 . Error. Select a list that contains the songs. speaker. Reset the iPod. ! Set the microphone correctly.. Error. Please check MIC. Once iPod main menu is displayed. an error message may appear on the display. Please check Rear speaker. Error. Please check Front-L speaker. Message Error. Error. try again. Transfer the songs to iPod.. Please check Subwoofer. connect the cable again..

Appendix Additional Information Understanding messages Messages CAUTION: Screen image may appear reversed. otherwise screen image may appear reversed. 92 En . Translation Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images.

shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play properly. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs. round discs. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. non-round. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) surface when handling the disc. ! Do not attach labels. write on or apply chemicals to the surface of the discs. Discs that have cracks. Do not use such discs. Video CD ! Check all discs for cracks. scratches or warping before playing. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. Additional Information CD ! If the heater is used in cold weather. wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center. it may not be possible to use certain functions. Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. condensation may form on components inside the DVD player. scratches or are warped may not play properly.Appendix Additional Information Handling guideline of discs and player ! Use only discs featuring any of following logos. DVD video ! Use only normal. ! To clean a disc. If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dry out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. If you insert irregular. En 93 .

playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. Do not insert AVCHD discs. finalized DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) disc cannot be recorded/edited. In addition. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other. high temperatures. ! For more information about recording mode. a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. However. To prevent this.Appendix Additional Information DVD-R/DVD-RW discs ! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back. contact the manufacturer of the application. on the lens of this unit. scratches or dirt on the disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW discs before using them. Please record with the correct format. In some cases. depending on the application settings and the environment. 94 En . Unplayable disc should be finalized. the disc may not be ejected. on the lens of this unit. ! Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible. ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be displayed by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). Serious scratches can lead to playback problems on this unit. However. CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used. etc. or dirt. because of disc characteristics. condensation.) ! Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may become impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight. (For details. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics. this unit is not compatible with Layer Jump recording mode. If inserted.) ! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back.. or the storage conditions in the vehicle. ! DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back. or dirt. please contact manufacture of DVD recorder or application. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed information about Dual Discs. ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. etc. AVCHD recorded discs ! This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) format. Please record with the correct format. scratches or dirt on the disc. since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard. depending on the application settings and the environment. condensation. contact the manufacturer of the application. ! The following logo indicates that this unit is compatible with DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). (For details. we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. unfinalized disc may not be played back. However.

! Multi-session playback is possible.1 kHz ! Transmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps ! Apple Lossless: No — Character sets other than Unicode that are used in Windows environment and are set to Russian in the multi-language setting Compressed audio files on the disc ! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive). ! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording.x is given priority than Version 1. mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iTunes ! File extension: . 2. ! You cannot connect a USB portable audio player/USB memory to this unit via a USB hub. copyright protected files that are stored in above-mentioned USB devices cannot be played back.m4a ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.mp3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR).x. ! Russian text to be displayed on this unit should be encoded with the following character sets: — Unicode (UTF-8.1. ! The text information of some audio files may not be correctly displayed. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. Lossless. this unit may not recognize the USB audio player/USB memory or audio files may not be played back properly. ! Partitioned USB memory is not compatible with this unit. 44.3 (ID3 tag Version 2. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in USB portable audio player/USB memory malfunction due to the resulting high temperature. UTF-16) ! This unit can play back files in the USB portable audio player/USB memory that is USB Mass Storage Class.wma ! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR).2. 2. compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs. ! Depending on the kind of USB portable audio player/USB memory you use. 48 kHz for emphasis) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1. However. VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (32. ! Only 32 characters from beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the file extension) or a folder name. Handling guideline and supplemental information ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. ! Compressed audio files are not compatible with packet write data transfer.1. En 95 . 1. Additional Information USB audio player/USB memory CAUTION Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the USB memory/USB portable audio player even if that data is lost while using this unit. ! This unit may not operate correctly depending on the application used to encode WMA files. Voice: No MP3 ! File extension: .Appendix Additional Information Compressed audio compatibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player ! File extension: . ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memory in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time.0. VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 Professional.

! Up to 3 500 files on a DVD (-R/-RW) can be played back.mp3). ! Up to 65 535 files on a USB portable audio player/USB memory can be played back.Appendix Additional Information ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memory in high temperature. ! Playback sequence of the audio file is the same as recorded sequence in the USB device. 2 Put those files into a folder. The sequence of audio files on USB memory For USB portable audio players. ! Do not connect anything other than the USB portable audio player/USB memory. ! 01 to 05 represent assigned folder numbers. you cannot specify the file playback sequence. 1 to 6 represent the playback sequence. ! To specify the playback sequence. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files on a USB portable audio player/USB memory with numerous folder hierarchies. depending on the system environment. — iPod nano first generation (software version 1. 1 Create the file name including numbers that specify the playback sequence (e. ! Up to 6 000 folders on a USB portable audio player/USB memory can be played back. ! Firmly secure the USB portable audio player/USB memory when driving. ! Up to 700 folders on a disc can be played back. where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal.1.3) 96 En . ! Depending on the USB devices connected to this unit. the following method is recommended.mp3 and 099yyy. ! Folder selection sequence or other operation may be altered depending on the encoding or writing software. ! Up to 999 files on a CD (-R/-RW) can be played back.1) — iPod nano second generation (software version 1. the sequence is different from that of USB memory and depends on the player. Older versions of iPod software may not be supported.3. 001xxx.g. ! This unit supports only the following iPods. Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 iPod compatibility The sequence of audio files on the disc ! This unit assigns folder numbers. ! Operations may vary depending on the kind of USB audio player and a USB memory. 3 Record the folder containing files into the USB device. The user cannot assign folder numbers and specify the playback sequence with this unit. Supported iPod software versions are shown below. it may generate noise in the radio. The user cannot assign folder numbers. Do not let the USB portable audio player/USB memory fall onto the floor. Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 5 6 4 However..

DivX video files ! Depending on the file information composition such as the number of audio stream. About handling the iPod CAUTION ! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the iPod even if that data is lost while using this unit. For details. changed to All when connecting the iPod to this unit. Pioneer CD-IU50 interface cable is also available.0) — iPhone 3G (software version 2.jpe or .jfif) as a JPEG picture file.1. ! This unit plays back files with the filename extension (. Also. refer to the iPod’s manuals. this unit changes the EQ (equalizer) setting of the iPod to Flat in order to optimize the acoustics.1 still image up to resolution of 8 192 × 7 680. search operation beyond this time limit is prohibited. For details.0) — iPod classic (software version 1. ! DivX files downloaded only from DivX partner site are guarantee of proper operation. (EXIF format is used most commonly with digital still cameras.jpe or . When using an iPod. . Unauthorized DivX file may not operate properly. JPEG picture files ! JPEG is short for Joint Photographic Experts Group and refers to a still image compression technology standard. consult your dealer.jfif). Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunction due to the resulting high temperature.jpeg. . ! Do not leave the iPod in a high temperature. do not use these extensions for files other than JPEG picture files. ! Some special operation may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files. . playback is stopped on the way. iPod Dock Connector to USB Cable is required. there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs. ! If a file contains more than 4 GB. where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. About iPod settings ! When an iPod is connected.) ! EXIF format that processed by the personal computer may not be played back. ! ! ! ! Additional Information Important ! When naming a JPEG picture file.3. ! DRM rental file cannot be operated until starting playing back.2) — iPod fifth generation (software version 1.1. When you disconnect the iPod. Even if you set Repeat to off on the iPod. ! Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. some functions can not be operated. ! Files are compatible with Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2. add the corresponding filename extension (.0) — iPhone (software version 2. ! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds.jpg. ! There is no progressive JPEG compatibility. ! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. the EQ returns to the original setting. ! You cannot set Repeat to off on the iPod when using this unit.jpeg. Do not let the iPod fall onto the floor.2) — iPod touch (software version 2.0) Depending on the generation or version of the iPod.jpg.Appendix Additional Information — iPod nano third generation (software version 1. Operations may vary depending on the software version of iPod. Repeat is automatically En 97 . . To prevent malfunctions.

as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause electric shock. Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent damage to the system. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. visit the following site: http://www. electric shock. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. or other failure.srt Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit. or repairs. do not attempt to carry out angle adjustment. turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. The screen can scratch easily. adjustments. it will become very hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. Storage temperature range: -20 °C to +80 °C At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range. ! The LCD screen is exposed in order to increase its visibility within the vehicle. About ID ® code. ! Do not disassemble or modify this unit. VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Compatible external subtitle file extension: . a strange noise or smell. You should avoid exposing the display unit to direct sunlight as much as possible. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as this may scratch it. or any other abnormal signs from the display. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. ! If you notice smoke. ! For more details about DivX. If an object gets between the display and main body. DivX compatibility ! Compatible format: DivX video format implemented in relation to DivX standards ! File extensions: . the display may stop working. refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registration code on page 53.com/ Handling the display ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. the display may not operate normally. Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in fire. 98 En .divx. Also.avi or . ! When the display is subjected to direct sunlight for a long period of time. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station for internal inspection. Dolby Digital ! LPCM: No ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR). or open/close the display by hand. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. MP3.divx ! DivX Ultra format: No ! DivX HD format: No ! DivX files without video data: No ! Compatible audio codec: MP2. ! Never touch the screen with anything besides your finger when operating the touch panel function.Appendix Additional Information ! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this unit to DivX VOD provider. ! The display should be used within the temperature ranges shown below.

Additional Information Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the service life of the fluorescent tube. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen. first turn the system power off. you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. Color. For details concerning operation. Hue. consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station. the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. ! When using a portable phone. — The fluorescent tube should last for approximately 10 000 hours. En 99 . Also. take care not to scratch the surface. the screen may become dark. make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. the viewing angle of the screen size is limited. etc. refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 58. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. For details concerning operation. If this happens. Changing the wide screen size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9. depending on operating conditions. Changing the picture adjustment You can make the best adjustment to the picture display by the Brightness. You can also dim or brighten the overall picture the Dimmer. and cool air from the cooler may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage.Appendix Additional Information Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air conditioner when it is opened. refer to Changing the picture adjustment on page 59. For viewing the LCD comfortably Due to its construction. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display. or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used inside the display may be shortened. then wipe with a soft dry cloth. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! At low temperatures. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display. colored stripes. ! When wiping the screen.) — When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life. keep the antenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots. if the display is cooled down by the cooler. the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. You can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjustment. Temperature and Black Level. Contrast.

0125 Azerbaijani (az). 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw).Appendix Additional Information Language code chart for DVD Language (code). 1320 Burmese (my). 0126 Bashkir (ba). 1325 Nauru (na). 1309 Macedonian (mk). 1001 English (en). 1119 Kurdish (ku). input code Pashto. 0119 Aymara (ay). 1601 Polish (pl). 0923 Yiddish (ji). 1620 Swedish (sv). 0615 Frisian (fy). 2020 Twi (tw). 0214 Tibetan (bo). 0401 Bhutani (dz). 1917 Serbian (sr). 2111 Urdu (ur). 0521 Persian (fa). 1318 Malay (ms). 2012 Setswana (tn). input code Japanese (ja). 0914 Icelandic (is). 0625 Irish (ga). 1920 Sundanese (su). 1923 Tamil (ta). 2621 100 En . 1823 Sanskrit (sa). 1319 Maltese (mt). 1121 Kirghiz (ky). 1814 Romanian (ro). 0208 Bislama (bi). 0106 Amharic (am). 1503 Oromo (om). 0113 Arabic (ar). 2118 Uzbek (uz). 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm). 1619 Quechua (qu). 1115 Greek (el). 0315 Czech (cs). 1915 Albanian (sq). 1220 Latvian (lv). 1922 Russian (ru). 1315 Marathi (mr). 2008 Tigrinya (ti). 0712 Language (code). 0901 Interlingue (ie). 0825 Interlingua (ia). 1222 Malagasy (mg). 0920 Chinese (zh). 1913 Shona (sn). 0207 Bihari (bh). 1513 Oriya (or). 1112 Cambodian (km). 0426 Esperanto (eo). 2001 Telugu (te). 1901 Sindhi (sd). 0714 Gujarati (gu). 0601 Finnish (fi). 2007 Thai (th). 1919 Sesotho (st). 2215 Wolof (wo). 2315 Xhosa (xh). 2019 Tatar (tt). 1813 Kirundi (rn). 0519 German (de). 2014 Tonga (to). 0905 Inupiak (ik). 1111 Greenlandic (kl). 2005 Tajik (tg). 0821 Armenian (hy). 0721 Hausa (ha). 0118 Assamese (as). 1125 Latin (la). 0801 Hindi (hi). 1912 Samoan (sm). 2126 Vietnamese (vi). 1612 Language (code). 1307 Maori (mi). 2515 Zulu (zu). 0704 Galician (gl). 1405 Norwegian (no). 0609 Fiji (fj). 0618 Spanish (es). 1412 Portuguese (pt). 0205 Bulgarian (bg). 0515 Estonian (et). 1311 Malayalam (ml). 0201 Byelorussian (be). Pushto (ps). 1914 Somali (so). 0209 Bengali (bn). 2408 Yoruba (yo). 1009 Javanese (jw). 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh). 2209 Volapük (vo). 1101 Kazakh (kk). 1314 Moldavian (mo). 0319 Welsh (cy). 0818 Hungarian (hu). 1921 Swahili (sw). 0919 Hebrew (iw). 1518 Panjabi (pa). 0218 Catalan (ca). 2023 Ukrainian (uk). 2011 Tagalog (tl). 1312 Mongolian (mn). 0102 Afrikaans (af). 1904 Sangho (sg). 0512 Afar (aa). 1908 Sinhalese (si). 1114 Kashmiri (ks). 1215 Lithuanian (lt). 0405 Italian (it). 1401 Nepali (ne). 1214 Laothian (lo). 0215 Breton (br). 2608 Dutch (nl). 2015 Turkish (tr). 0809 Croatian (hr). 0325 Danish (da). 1023 Georgian (ka). input code Guarani (gn). 0101 Abkhazian (ab). 1918 Siswati (ss). 2009 Turkmen (tk). 1821 Korean (ko). 0301 Corsican (co). 0520 Basque (eu). 1415 Occitan (oc). 1113 Kannada (kn). 1909 Slovak (sk). 2018 Tsonga (ts). 1911 Slovenian (sl). 0610 Faroese (fo). 0514 French (fr). 1201 Lingala (ln). 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd). 0911 Indonesian (in).

.. and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. registered in the U.Appendix Additional Information Copyright and trademark notice ! This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. An independent license for such use is required.S. registered in the U. non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i. intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems.S. Inc. such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. WMA iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. and other countries. DVD video MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private. and other countries. satellite.S.e. ! This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing.com. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. revenuegenerating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial.mp3licensing. En 101 . iPhone Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. please visit http://www. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation. iTunes iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPod Additional Information is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. cable and/or any other media). broadcasting/streaming via internet. For details.

© 1996-2007 DTS.942 & other U. Inc. DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS. Inc. Pro Logic. and worldwide patents issued & pending. 102 En . and are used under license.S.451.Appendix Additional Information Dolby Pro Logic II Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. All Rights Reserved. DivX DivX. Inc. DivX Certified. DTS Digital Out Manufactured under license under U. Dolby.S. and associated logos are trademarks of DivX. Patent #: 5. and the doubleD symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Appendix

Additional Information Terms
AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for download online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to-use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is
En

the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and softest sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume levels. EXIF (Exchangeable image file) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back.

103

Additional Information

Appendix

Additional Information
ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the format logic of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of three characters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and a file extension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. JPEG This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, and is an international still image compression standard. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality. m3u Playlists created using the “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a conventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature digital audio compressed and recorded using this system. MS ADPCM This stands for Microsoft adaptive differential pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for the multimedia software of Microsoft Corporation. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, letting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that allows additional data to be recorded later. When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-session is a method of recording more than 2 sessions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Number of quantization bits The number of quantization bits is one factor in the overall sound quality; the higher the “bit-depth”, the better the sound quality. However, increasing the bit-depth also increases the amount of data and therefore storage space required.

104

En

Appendix

Additional Information
Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult-oriented scenes feature parental lock which prevents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (Version 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. You can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same region number as the DVD player. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity, enabling recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other functions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compression, it is possible to achieve compressionpriority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media™ Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later. Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

En

105

Additional Information

.......Appendix Additional Information Specifications General Power source ........ 9........ +6 dB to –24 dB Phase ....7 µV/75 W. 4 W to 8 W × 4 4 W to 8 W × 2 + 2 W × 1 Preout max output level ........... 2 (stereo) MP3 decoding format .... 336 960 (1 440 × 234) Display method . 8......15k/8k/10k/12.... DVD-VR... PAL/SECAM compatible Durable temperature range (power off) .......................................... 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ...avi........ DVD video...................................... USB 2.......m4a) (Ver......... Ver.... DivX...................15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain .......3 mm) Pixels .........5k Hz Q Factor ................................. 1.. 28 µV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio .................. both channels driven) Load impedance ......................................................35/0...............59/0......95/1..... 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ........................... 171 mm × 97 mm × 9 mm Weight ............. mono...............15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ............. MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......................m4a) (Ver..8 V to 15....... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ..2 × 81......... CD............................... 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz (9 kHz) Usable sensitivity . Video CD.................1............... MSC (Mass Storage Class) File system ..... ........................15 (+6 dB when boosted) Gain ....................... 7.................. 50 W × 4 50 W × 2/4 W + 70 W × 1/2 W (for subwoofer) Continuous power output . Video CD.. 6..... CD-R/RW....... 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Factor ................. 8. current consumption ...0 full speed Maximum current supply .....................95/1.1 V allowable) Grounding system ............. 3....... 8.............................................59/0......95/1. Normal/Reverse Bass boost: Gain ... 72 dB (IEC-A network) MW tuner Frequency range ............2.. Ver..... 3. MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ............... 10... Home Theater Ver...............35/0............ DVD video.. at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio . +12 dB to 0 dB USB USB standard specification .............. 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD...........0 A Dimensions (W × H × D): DIN Chassis ........1.................. MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes encoded only) (... 62 dB (IEC-A network) Note Specifications and the design are subject to modifications without notice due to improvements.............. 500 mA USB Class ... 0.................. 0.........0 V Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer): Low Frequency ........... 8.............95 inch wide/16:9 (effective display area: 155.. -20 °C to +80 °C Audio Maximum power output .. 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ......... 5% THD..... USB 1..... 106 En .......... FAT16...59/0................................. 7............. 6 (.... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz Slope ..................... 10. 4..........0 Vp-p/75 W (±0.............0 MHz Usable sensitivity ... CD............... MP3... TFT active matrix Color system ..2 V) Number of channels ... 62 dB (IEC-A network) LW tuner Frequency range ............. –12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): Frequency .......... 2 Frequency response ...7 kg DVD Player System ...................... 22 W × 4 (1 kHz... 87......divx) Display Screen size/aspect ratio . 1....... MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes encoded only) (.... 153 kHz to 281 kHz Usable sensitivity ... WMA......4 V DC (10............... 4 W load................. 7.......... ±12 dB HPF: Frequency .....1........ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Factor .... DVD-R/RW/RDL Region number ..0 and earlier) DivX decoding format ............... 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A network) (RCA level) Output level: Video ........... JPEG system Usable discs ............ 5............... 14........ 9 dBf (0.35/0.......5 MHz to 108.................. 0...... 4... –18 dB/oct Gain ................0 and earlier) FM tuner Frequency range ................ 7. 10..................... Negative type Max.... 178 mm × 100 mm × 165 mm Nose ...................... ±12 dB High Frequency ......... S/N: 30 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ... AAC.................. FAT32 MP3 decoding format ............. ±12 dB Mid Frequency ........ 9......................

103 DivX Certified ..8..........8........104 Multi-subtitle .....................104 Multi-audio ........................103 H Hue ...........93 W Wide screen mode ......................104 L Language code chart ...............................28 Playback control (PBC) .........................................................59 D DivX ................105 PBC (playback control) ......................................14..........26.....................104 M Menu language ......................................26........38.........................26........................25................24 Brightness ................................................................................................52..................................103 E EXIF ....................26....................................103 Code number .........105 S Subtitle language ...............................Index A Angle icon .............103 Dolby Digital .............................7.......................................51......51 V Video CD .......51 Aspect ratio .........................103 Dolby Pro Logic II ....................38...................52 Color ...........................................................103 Audio language ...................................50 T Title ..............................................................................................................................................................100 Linear PCM (LPCM) ...........................................................................................................................................51 MPEG ...........103 Dynamic range control ................................................................59 C Chapter .....105 TV aspect .........103 DTS .................................................................................................................104 Multi-angle ....................105 R Region number ....25.................59 J JPEG ........................102....................59 Contrast ..........................104 P Parental lock .............................50 B Bookmark ........................................102..................38......................................................................................58 En 107 .........................................38............

de C.A. Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570. Braeside. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087. JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.Lomas de Chapultepec. Mexico.V. MEGURO 1-CHOME. Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA. Copyright © 2008 by Pioneer Corporation. Markham. MEGURO-KU TOKYO 153-8654. Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 TEL: 905-479-4411 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO. Ontario L3R 0P2. 253 Alexandra Road. #04-01. <KSNZX> <08J00000> <CRB2878-A/N> EW . LTD.PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 先鋒股份有限公司 總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓 電話: (02) 2521-3588 先鋒電子(香港)有限公司 香港九龍尖沙嘴海港域世界商業中心 9樓901-6室 電話: (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporation. B-9120 Melsele. INC. All rights reserved. 300 Allstate Parkway. LTD. U. Box 1540. California 90801-1540. 178-184 Boundary Road. Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. D.S.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.O.A.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. Long Beach. S. Blvd. P. Victoria 3195. Keetberglaan 1.05.F.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful